Parent Directory
|
Revision Log
Rename the (as yet unreleased) PCRE_NO_AUTO_POSSESSIFY option to PCRE_NO_AUTO_POSSESS - no need to be so long - and to match (*NO_AUTO_POSSESS).
1 | /************************************************* |
2 | * Perl-Compatible Regular Expressions * |
3 | *************************************************/ |
4 | |
5 | /* PCRE is a library of functions to support regular expressions whose syntax |
6 | and semantics are as close as possible to those of the Perl 5 language. |
7 | |
8 | Written by Philip Hazel |
9 | Copyright (c) 1997-2013 University of Cambridge |
10 | |
11 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
12 | Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without |
13 | modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: |
14 | |
15 | * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, |
16 | this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. |
17 | |
18 | * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright |
19 | notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the |
20 | documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. |
21 | |
22 | * Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the names of its |
23 | contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from |
24 | this software without specific prior written permission. |
25 | |
26 | THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" |
27 | AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE |
28 | IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE |
29 | ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE |
30 | LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR |
31 | CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF |
32 | SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS |
33 | INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN |
34 | CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) |
35 | ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE |
36 | POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. |
37 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
38 | */ |
39 | |
40 | |
41 | /* This module contains the external function pcre_compile(), along with |
42 | supporting internal functions that are not used by other modules. */ |
43 | |
44 | |
45 | #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H |
46 | #include "config.h" |
47 | #endif |
48 | |
49 | #define NLBLOCK cd /* Block containing newline information */ |
50 | #define PSSTART start_pattern /* Field containing processed string start */ |
51 | #define PSEND end_pattern /* Field containing processed string end */ |
52 | |
53 | #include "pcre_internal.h" |
54 | |
55 | |
56 | /* When PCRE_DEBUG is defined, we need the pcre(16|32)_printint() function, which |
57 | is also used by pcretest. PCRE_DEBUG is not defined when building a production |
58 | library. We do not need to select pcre16_printint.c specially, because the |
59 | COMPILE_PCREx macro will already be appropriately set. */ |
60 | |
61 | #ifdef PCRE_DEBUG |
62 | /* pcre_printint.c should not include any headers */ |
63 | #define PCRE_INCLUDED |
64 | #include "pcre_printint.c" |
65 | #undef PCRE_INCLUDED |
66 | #endif |
67 | |
68 | |
69 | /* Macro for setting individual bits in class bitmaps. */ |
70 | |
71 | #define SETBIT(a,b) a[(b)/8] |= (1 << ((b)&7)) |
72 | |
73 | /* Maximum length value to check against when making sure that the integer that |
74 | holds the compiled pattern length does not overflow. We make it a bit less than |
75 | INT_MAX to allow for adding in group terminating bytes, so that we don't have |
76 | to check them every time. */ |
77 | |
78 | #define OFLOW_MAX (INT_MAX - 20) |
79 | |
80 | /* Definitions to allow mutual recursion */ |
81 | |
82 | static int |
83 | add_list_to_class(pcre_uint8 *, pcre_uchar **, int, compile_data *, |
84 | const pcre_uint32 *, unsigned int); |
85 | |
86 | static BOOL |
87 | compile_regex(int, pcre_uchar **, const pcre_uchar **, int *, BOOL, BOOL, int, int, |
88 | pcre_uint32 *, pcre_int32 *, pcre_uint32 *, pcre_int32 *, branch_chain *, |
89 | compile_data *, int *); |
90 | |
91 | |
92 | |
93 | /************************************************* |
94 | * Code parameters and static tables * |
95 | *************************************************/ |
96 | |
97 | /* This value specifies the size of stack workspace that is used during the |
98 | first pre-compile phase that determines how much memory is required. The regex |
99 | is partly compiled into this space, but the compiled parts are discarded as |
100 | soon as they can be, so that hopefully there will never be an overrun. The code |
101 | does, however, check for an overrun. The largest amount I've seen used is 218, |
102 | so this number is very generous. |
103 | |
104 | The same workspace is used during the second, actual compile phase for |
105 | remembering forward references to groups so that they can be filled in at the |
106 | end. Each entry in this list occupies LINK_SIZE bytes, so even when LINK_SIZE |
107 | is 4 there is plenty of room for most patterns. However, the memory can get |
108 | filled up by repetitions of forward references, for example patterns like |
109 | /(?1){0,1999}(b)/, and one user did hit the limit. The code has been changed so |
110 | that the workspace is expanded using malloc() in this situation. The value |
111 | below is therefore a minimum, and we put a maximum on it for safety. The |
112 | minimum is now also defined in terms of LINK_SIZE so that the use of malloc() |
113 | kicks in at the same number of forward references in all cases. */ |
114 | |
115 | #define COMPILE_WORK_SIZE (2048*LINK_SIZE) |
116 | #define COMPILE_WORK_SIZE_MAX (100*COMPILE_WORK_SIZE) |
117 | |
118 | /* This value determines the size of the initial vector that is used for |
119 | remembering named groups during the pre-compile. It is allocated on the stack, |
120 | but if it is too small, it is expanded using malloc(), in a similar way to the |
121 | workspace. The value is the number of slots in the list. */ |
122 | |
123 | #define NAMED_GROUP_LIST_SIZE 20 |
124 | |
125 | /* The overrun tests check for a slightly smaller size so that they detect the |
126 | overrun before it actually does run off the end of the data block. */ |
127 | |
128 | #define WORK_SIZE_SAFETY_MARGIN (100) |
129 | |
130 | /* Private flags added to firstchar and reqchar. */ |
131 | |
132 | #define REQ_CASELESS (1 << 0) /* Indicates caselessness */ |
133 | #define REQ_VARY (1 << 1) /* Reqchar followed non-literal item */ |
134 | /* Negative values for the firstchar and reqchar flags */ |
135 | #define REQ_UNSET (-2) |
136 | #define REQ_NONE (-1) |
137 | |
138 | /* Repeated character flags. */ |
139 | |
140 | #define UTF_LENGTH 0x10000000l /* The char contains its length. */ |
141 | |
142 | /* Table for handling escaped characters in the range '0'-'z'. Positive returns |
143 | are simple data values; negative values are for special things like \d and so |
144 | on. Zero means further processing is needed (for things like \x), or the escape |
145 | is invalid. */ |
146 | |
147 | #ifndef EBCDIC |
148 | |
149 | /* This is the "normal" table for ASCII systems or for EBCDIC systems running |
150 | in UTF-8 mode. */ |
151 | |
152 | static const short int escapes[] = { |
153 | 0, 0, |
154 | 0, 0, |
155 | 0, 0, |
156 | 0, 0, |
157 | 0, 0, |
158 | CHAR_COLON, CHAR_SEMICOLON, |
159 | CHAR_LESS_THAN_SIGN, CHAR_EQUALS_SIGN, |
160 | CHAR_GREATER_THAN_SIGN, CHAR_QUESTION_MARK, |
161 | CHAR_COMMERCIAL_AT, -ESC_A, |
162 | -ESC_B, -ESC_C, |
163 | -ESC_D, -ESC_E, |
164 | 0, -ESC_G, |
165 | -ESC_H, 0, |
166 | 0, -ESC_K, |
167 | 0, 0, |
168 | -ESC_N, 0, |
169 | -ESC_P, -ESC_Q, |
170 | -ESC_R, -ESC_S, |
171 | 0, 0, |
172 | -ESC_V, -ESC_W, |
173 | -ESC_X, 0, |
174 | -ESC_Z, CHAR_LEFT_SQUARE_BRACKET, |
175 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET, |
176 | CHAR_CIRCUMFLEX_ACCENT, CHAR_UNDERSCORE, |
177 | CHAR_GRAVE_ACCENT, 7, |
178 | -ESC_b, 0, |
179 | -ESC_d, ESC_e, |
180 | ESC_f, 0, |
181 | -ESC_h, 0, |
182 | 0, -ESC_k, |
183 | 0, 0, |
184 | ESC_n, 0, |
185 | -ESC_p, 0, |
186 | ESC_r, -ESC_s, |
187 | ESC_tee, 0, |
188 | -ESC_v, -ESC_w, |
189 | 0, 0, |
190 | -ESC_z |
191 | }; |
192 | |
193 | #else |
194 | |
195 | /* This is the "abnormal" table for EBCDIC systems without UTF-8 support. */ |
196 | |
197 | static const short int escapes[] = { |
198 | /* 48 */ 0, 0, 0, '.', '<', '(', '+', '|', |
199 | /* 50 */ '&', 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, |
200 | /* 58 */ 0, 0, '!', '$', '*', ')', ';', '~', |
201 | /* 60 */ '-', '/', 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, |
202 | /* 68 */ 0, 0, '|', ',', '%', '_', '>', '?', |
203 | /* 70 */ 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, |
204 | /* 78 */ 0, '`', ':', '#', '@', '\'', '=', '"', |
205 | /* 80 */ 0, 7, -ESC_b, 0, -ESC_d, ESC_e, ESC_f, 0, |
206 | /* 88 */-ESC_h, 0, 0, '{', 0, 0, 0, 0, |
207 | /* 90 */ 0, 0, -ESC_k, 'l', 0, ESC_n, 0, -ESC_p, |
208 | /* 98 */ 0, ESC_r, 0, '}', 0, 0, 0, 0, |
209 | /* A0 */ 0, '~', -ESC_s, ESC_tee, 0,-ESC_v, -ESC_w, 0, |
210 | /* A8 */ 0,-ESC_z, 0, 0, 0, '[', 0, 0, |
211 | /* B0 */ 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, |
212 | /* B8 */ 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, ']', '=', '-', |
213 | /* C0 */ '{',-ESC_A, -ESC_B, -ESC_C, -ESC_D,-ESC_E, 0, -ESC_G, |
214 | /* C8 */-ESC_H, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, |
215 | /* D0 */ '}', 0, -ESC_K, 0, 0,-ESC_N, 0, -ESC_P, |
216 | /* D8 */-ESC_Q,-ESC_R, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, |
217 | /* E0 */ '\\', 0, -ESC_S, 0, 0,-ESC_V, -ESC_W, -ESC_X, |
218 | /* E8 */ 0,-ESC_Z, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, |
219 | /* F0 */ 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, |
220 | /* F8 */ 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 |
221 | }; |
222 | #endif |
223 | |
224 | |
225 | /* Table of special "verbs" like (*PRUNE). This is a short table, so it is |
226 | searched linearly. Put all the names into a single string, in order to reduce |
227 | the number of relocations when a shared library is dynamically linked. The |
228 | string is built from string macros so that it works in UTF-8 mode on EBCDIC |
229 | platforms. */ |
230 | |
231 | typedef struct verbitem { |
232 | int len; /* Length of verb name */ |
233 | int op; /* Op when no arg, or -1 if arg mandatory */ |
234 | int op_arg; /* Op when arg present, or -1 if not allowed */ |
235 | } verbitem; |
236 | |
237 | static const char verbnames[] = |
238 | "\0" /* Empty name is a shorthand for MARK */ |
239 | STRING_MARK0 |
240 | STRING_ACCEPT0 |
241 | STRING_COMMIT0 |
242 | STRING_F0 |
243 | STRING_FAIL0 |
244 | STRING_PRUNE0 |
245 | STRING_SKIP0 |
246 | STRING_THEN; |
247 | |
248 | static const verbitem verbs[] = { |
249 | { 0, -1, OP_MARK }, |
250 | { 4, -1, OP_MARK }, |
251 | { 6, OP_ACCEPT, -1 }, |
252 | { 6, OP_COMMIT, -1 }, |
253 | { 1, OP_FAIL, -1 }, |
254 | { 4, OP_FAIL, -1 }, |
255 | { 5, OP_PRUNE, OP_PRUNE_ARG }, |
256 | { 4, OP_SKIP, OP_SKIP_ARG }, |
257 | { 4, OP_THEN, OP_THEN_ARG } |
258 | }; |
259 | |
260 | static const int verbcount = sizeof(verbs)/sizeof(verbitem); |
261 | |
262 | |
263 | /* Tables of names of POSIX character classes and their lengths. The names are |
264 | now all in a single string, to reduce the number of relocations when a shared |
265 | library is dynamically loaded. The list of lengths is terminated by a zero |
266 | length entry. The first three must be alpha, lower, upper, as this is assumed |
267 | for handling case independence. The indices for graph, print, and punct are |
268 | needed, so identify them. */ |
269 | |
270 | static const char posix_names[] = |
271 | STRING_alpha0 STRING_lower0 STRING_upper0 STRING_alnum0 |
272 | STRING_ascii0 STRING_blank0 STRING_cntrl0 STRING_digit0 |
273 | STRING_graph0 STRING_print0 STRING_punct0 STRING_space0 |
274 | STRING_word0 STRING_xdigit; |
275 | |
276 | static const pcre_uint8 posix_name_lengths[] = { |
277 | 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, 4, 6, 0 }; |
278 | |
279 | #define PC_GRAPH 8 |
280 | #define PC_PRINT 9 |
281 | #define PC_PUNCT 10 |
282 | |
283 | |
284 | /* Table of class bit maps for each POSIX class. Each class is formed from a |
285 | base map, with an optional addition or removal of another map. Then, for some |
286 | classes, there is some additional tweaking: for [:blank:] the vertical space |
287 | characters are removed, and for [:alpha:] and [:alnum:] the underscore |
288 | character is removed. The triples in the table consist of the base map offset, |
289 | second map offset or -1 if no second map, and a non-negative value for map |
290 | addition or a negative value for map subtraction (if there are two maps). The |
291 | absolute value of the third field has these meanings: 0 => no tweaking, 1 => |
292 | remove vertical space characters, 2 => remove underscore. */ |
293 | |
294 | static const int posix_class_maps[] = { |
295 | cbit_word, cbit_digit, -2, /* alpha */ |
296 | cbit_lower, -1, 0, /* lower */ |
297 | cbit_upper, -1, 0, /* upper */ |
298 | cbit_word, -1, 2, /* alnum - word without underscore */ |
299 | cbit_print, cbit_cntrl, 0, /* ascii */ |
300 | cbit_space, -1, 1, /* blank - a GNU extension */ |
301 | cbit_cntrl, -1, 0, /* cntrl */ |
302 | cbit_digit, -1, 0, /* digit */ |
303 | cbit_graph, -1, 0, /* graph */ |
304 | cbit_print, -1, 0, /* print */ |
305 | cbit_punct, -1, 0, /* punct */ |
306 | cbit_space, -1, 0, /* space */ |
307 | cbit_word, -1, 0, /* word - a Perl extension */ |
308 | cbit_xdigit,-1, 0 /* xdigit */ |
309 | }; |
310 | |
311 | /* Table of substitutes for \d etc when PCRE_UCP is set. They are replaced by |
312 | Unicode property escapes. */ |
313 | |
314 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
315 | static const pcre_uchar string_PNd[] = { |
316 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_P, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
317 | CHAR_N, CHAR_d, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
318 | static const pcre_uchar string_pNd[] = { |
319 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_p, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
320 | CHAR_N, CHAR_d, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
321 | static const pcre_uchar string_PXsp[] = { |
322 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_P, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
323 | CHAR_X, CHAR_s, CHAR_p, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
324 | static const pcre_uchar string_pXsp[] = { |
325 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_p, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
326 | CHAR_X, CHAR_s, CHAR_p, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
327 | static const pcre_uchar string_PXwd[] = { |
328 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_P, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
329 | CHAR_X, CHAR_w, CHAR_d, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
330 | static const pcre_uchar string_pXwd[] = { |
331 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_p, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
332 | CHAR_X, CHAR_w, CHAR_d, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
333 | |
334 | static const pcre_uchar *substitutes[] = { |
335 | string_PNd, /* \D */ |
336 | string_pNd, /* \d */ |
337 | string_PXsp, /* \S */ /* Xsp is Perl space, but from 8.34, Perl */ |
338 | string_pXsp, /* \s */ /* space and POSIX space are the same. */ |
339 | string_PXwd, /* \W */ |
340 | string_pXwd /* \w */ |
341 | }; |
342 | |
343 | /* The POSIX class substitutes must be in the order of the POSIX class names, |
344 | defined above, and there are both positive and negative cases. NULL means no |
345 | general substitute of a Unicode property escape (\p or \P). However, for some |
346 | POSIX classes (e.g. graph, print, punct) a special property code is compiled |
347 | directly. */ |
348 | |
349 | static const pcre_uchar string_pL[] = { |
350 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_p, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
351 | CHAR_L, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
352 | static const pcre_uchar string_pLl[] = { |
353 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_p, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
354 | CHAR_L, CHAR_l, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
355 | static const pcre_uchar string_pLu[] = { |
356 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_p, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
357 | CHAR_L, CHAR_u, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
358 | static const pcre_uchar string_pXan[] = { |
359 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_p, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
360 | CHAR_X, CHAR_a, CHAR_n, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
361 | static const pcre_uchar string_h[] = { |
362 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_h, '\0' }; |
363 | static const pcre_uchar string_pXps[] = { |
364 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_p, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
365 | CHAR_X, CHAR_p, CHAR_s, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
366 | static const pcre_uchar string_PL[] = { |
367 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_P, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
368 | CHAR_L, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
369 | static const pcre_uchar string_PLl[] = { |
370 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_P, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
371 | CHAR_L, CHAR_l, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
372 | static const pcre_uchar string_PLu[] = { |
373 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_P, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
374 | CHAR_L, CHAR_u, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
375 | static const pcre_uchar string_PXan[] = { |
376 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_P, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
377 | CHAR_X, CHAR_a, CHAR_n, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
378 | static const pcre_uchar string_H[] = { |
379 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_H, '\0' }; |
380 | static const pcre_uchar string_PXps[] = { |
381 | CHAR_BACKSLASH, CHAR_P, CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET, |
382 | CHAR_X, CHAR_p, CHAR_s, CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET, '\0' }; |
383 | |
384 | static const pcre_uchar *posix_substitutes[] = { |
385 | string_pL, /* alpha */ |
386 | string_pLl, /* lower */ |
387 | string_pLu, /* upper */ |
388 | string_pXan, /* alnum */ |
389 | NULL, /* ascii */ |
390 | string_h, /* blank */ |
391 | NULL, /* cntrl */ |
392 | string_pNd, /* digit */ |
393 | NULL, /* graph */ |
394 | NULL, /* print */ |
395 | NULL, /* punct */ |
396 | string_pXps, /* space */ /* Xps is POSIX space, but from 8.34 */ |
397 | string_pXwd, /* word */ /* Perl and POSIX space are the same */ |
398 | NULL, /* xdigit */ |
399 | /* Negated cases */ |
400 | string_PL, /* ^alpha */ |
401 | string_PLl, /* ^lower */ |
402 | string_PLu, /* ^upper */ |
403 | string_PXan, /* ^alnum */ |
404 | NULL, /* ^ascii */ |
405 | string_H, /* ^blank */ |
406 | NULL, /* ^cntrl */ |
407 | string_PNd, /* ^digit */ |
408 | NULL, /* ^graph */ |
409 | NULL, /* ^print */ |
410 | NULL, /* ^punct */ |
411 | string_PXps, /* ^space */ /* Xps is POSIX space, but from 8.34 */ |
412 | string_PXwd, /* ^word */ /* Perl and POSIX space are the same */ |
413 | NULL /* ^xdigit */ |
414 | }; |
415 | #define POSIX_SUBSIZE (sizeof(posix_substitutes) / sizeof(pcre_uchar *)) |
416 | #endif |
417 | |
418 | #define STRING(a) # a |
419 | #define XSTRING(s) STRING(s) |
420 | |
421 | /* The texts of compile-time error messages. These are "char *" because they |
422 | are passed to the outside world. Do not ever re-use any error number, because |
423 | they are documented. Always add a new error instead. Messages marked DEAD below |
424 | are no longer used. This used to be a table of strings, but in order to reduce |
425 | the number of relocations needed when a shared library is loaded dynamically, |
426 | it is now one long string. We cannot use a table of offsets, because the |
427 | lengths of inserts such as XSTRING(MAX_NAME_SIZE) are not known. Instead, we |
428 | simply count through to the one we want - this isn't a performance issue |
429 | because these strings are used only when there is a compilation error. |
430 | |
431 | Each substring ends with \0 to insert a null character. This includes the final |
432 | substring, so that the whole string ends with \0\0, which can be detected when |
433 | counting through. */ |
434 | |
435 | static const char error_texts[] = |
436 | "no error\0" |
437 | "\\ at end of pattern\0" |
438 | "\\c at end of pattern\0" |
439 | "unrecognized character follows \\\0" |
440 | "numbers out of order in {} quantifier\0" |
441 | /* 5 */ |
442 | "number too big in {} quantifier\0" |
443 | "missing terminating ] for character class\0" |
444 | "invalid escape sequence in character class\0" |
445 | "range out of order in character class\0" |
446 | "nothing to repeat\0" |
447 | /* 10 */ |
448 | "operand of unlimited repeat could match the empty string\0" /** DEAD **/ |
449 | "internal error: unexpected repeat\0" |
450 | "unrecognized character after (? or (?-\0" |
451 | "POSIX named classes are supported only within a class\0" |
452 | "missing )\0" |
453 | /* 15 */ |
454 | "reference to non-existent subpattern\0" |
455 | "erroffset passed as NULL\0" |
456 | "unknown option bit(s) set\0" |
457 | "missing ) after comment\0" |
458 | "parentheses nested too deeply\0" /** DEAD **/ |
459 | /* 20 */ |
460 | "regular expression is too large\0" |
461 | "failed to get memory\0" |
462 | "unmatched parentheses\0" |
463 | "internal error: code overflow\0" |
464 | "unrecognized character after (?<\0" |
465 | /* 25 */ |
466 | "lookbehind assertion is not fixed length\0" |
467 | "malformed number or name after (?(\0" |
468 | "conditional group contains more than two branches\0" |
469 | "assertion expected after (?(\0" |
470 | "(?R or (?[+-]digits must be followed by )\0" |
471 | /* 30 */ |
472 | "unknown POSIX class name\0" |
473 | "POSIX collating elements are not supported\0" |
474 | "this version of PCRE is compiled without UTF support\0" |
475 | "spare error\0" /** DEAD **/ |
476 | "character value in \\x{} or \\o{} is too large\0" |
477 | /* 35 */ |
478 | "invalid condition (?(0)\0" |
479 | "\\C not allowed in lookbehind assertion\0" |
480 | "PCRE does not support \\L, \\l, \\N{name}, \\U, or \\u\0" |
481 | "number after (?C is > 255\0" |
482 | "closing ) for (?C expected\0" |
483 | /* 40 */ |
484 | "recursive call could loop indefinitely\0" |
485 | "unrecognized character after (?P\0" |
486 | "syntax error in subpattern name (missing terminator)\0" |
487 | "two named subpatterns have the same name\0" |
488 | "invalid UTF-8 string\0" |
489 | /* 45 */ |
490 | "support for \\P, \\p, and \\X has not been compiled\0" |
491 | "malformed \\P or \\p sequence\0" |
492 | "unknown property name after \\P or \\p\0" |
493 | "subpattern name is too long (maximum " XSTRING(MAX_NAME_SIZE) " characters)\0" |
494 | "too many named subpatterns (maximum " XSTRING(MAX_NAME_COUNT) ")\0" |
495 | /* 50 */ |
496 | "repeated subpattern is too long\0" /** DEAD **/ |
497 | "octal value is greater than \\377 in 8-bit non-UTF-8 mode\0" |
498 | "internal error: overran compiling workspace\0" |
499 | "internal error: previously-checked referenced subpattern not found\0" |
500 | "DEFINE group contains more than one branch\0" |
501 | /* 55 */ |
502 | "repeating a DEFINE group is not allowed\0" /** DEAD **/ |
503 | "inconsistent NEWLINE options\0" |
504 | "\\g is not followed by a braced, angle-bracketed, or quoted name/number or by a plain number\0" |
505 | "a numbered reference must not be zero\0" |
506 | "an argument is not allowed for (*ACCEPT), (*FAIL), or (*COMMIT)\0" |
507 | /* 60 */ |
508 | "(*VERB) not recognized or malformed\0" |
509 | "number is too big\0" |
510 | "subpattern name expected\0" |
511 | "digit expected after (?+\0" |
512 | "] is an invalid data character in JavaScript compatibility mode\0" |
513 | /* 65 */ |
514 | "different names for subpatterns of the same number are not allowed\0" |
515 | "(*MARK) must have an argument\0" |
516 | "this version of PCRE is not compiled with Unicode property support\0" |
517 | "\\c must be followed by an ASCII character\0" |
518 | "\\k is not followed by a braced, angle-bracketed, or quoted name\0" |
519 | /* 70 */ |
520 | "internal error: unknown opcode in find_fixedlength()\0" |
521 | "\\N is not supported in a class\0" |
522 | "too many forward references\0" |
523 | "disallowed Unicode code point (>= 0xd800 && <= 0xdfff)\0" |
524 | "invalid UTF-16 string\0" |
525 | /* 75 */ |
526 | "name is too long in (*MARK), (*PRUNE), (*SKIP), or (*THEN)\0" |
527 | "character value in \\u.... sequence is too large\0" |
528 | "invalid UTF-32 string\0" |
529 | "setting UTF is disabled by the application\0" |
530 | "non-hex character in \\x{} (closing brace missing?)\0" |
531 | /* 80 */ |
532 | "non-octal character in \\o{} (closing brace missing?)\0" |
533 | "missing opening brace after \\o\0" |
534 | "parentheses are too deeply nested\0" |
535 | "invalid range in character class\0" |
536 | "group name must start with a non-digit\0" |
537 | ; |
538 | |
539 | /* Table to identify digits and hex digits. This is used when compiling |
540 | patterns. Note that the tables in chartables are dependent on the locale, and |
541 | may mark arbitrary characters as digits - but the PCRE compiling code expects |
542 | to handle only 0-9, a-z, and A-Z as digits when compiling. That is why we have |
543 | a private table here. It costs 256 bytes, but it is a lot faster than doing |
544 | character value tests (at least in some simple cases I timed), and in some |
545 | applications one wants PCRE to compile efficiently as well as match |
546 | efficiently. |
547 | |
548 | For convenience, we use the same bit definitions as in chartables: |
549 | |
550 | 0x04 decimal digit |
551 | 0x08 hexadecimal digit |
552 | |
553 | Then we can use ctype_digit and ctype_xdigit in the code. */ |
554 | |
555 | /* Using a simple comparison for decimal numbers rather than a memory read |
556 | is much faster, and the resulting code is simpler (the compiler turns it |
557 | into a subtraction and unsigned comparison). */ |
558 | |
559 | #define IS_DIGIT(x) ((x) >= CHAR_0 && (x) <= CHAR_9) |
560 | |
561 | #ifndef EBCDIC |
562 | |
563 | /* This is the "normal" case, for ASCII systems, and EBCDIC systems running in |
564 | UTF-8 mode. */ |
565 | |
566 | static const pcre_uint8 digitab[] = |
567 | { |
568 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 0- 7 */ |
569 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 8- 15 */ |
570 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 16- 23 */ |
571 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 24- 31 */ |
572 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* - ' */ |
573 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* ( - / */ |
574 | 0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c, /* 0 - 7 */ |
575 | 0x0c,0x0c,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 8 - ? */ |
576 | 0x00,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x00, /* @ - G */ |
577 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* H - O */ |
578 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* P - W */ |
579 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* X - _ */ |
580 | 0x00,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x00, /* ` - g */ |
581 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* h - o */ |
582 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* p - w */ |
583 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* x -127 */ |
584 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 128-135 */ |
585 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 136-143 */ |
586 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 144-151 */ |
587 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 152-159 */ |
588 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 160-167 */ |
589 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 168-175 */ |
590 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 176-183 */ |
591 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 184-191 */ |
592 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 192-199 */ |
593 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 200-207 */ |
594 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 208-215 */ |
595 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 216-223 */ |
596 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 224-231 */ |
597 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 232-239 */ |
598 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 240-247 */ |
599 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00};/* 248-255 */ |
600 | |
601 | #else |
602 | |
603 | /* This is the "abnormal" case, for EBCDIC systems not running in UTF-8 mode. */ |
604 | |
605 | static const pcre_uint8 digitab[] = |
606 | { |
607 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 0- 7 0 */ |
608 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 8- 15 */ |
609 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 16- 23 10 */ |
610 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 24- 31 */ |
611 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 32- 39 20 */ |
612 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 40- 47 */ |
613 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 48- 55 30 */ |
614 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 56- 63 */ |
615 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* - 71 40 */ |
616 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 72- | */ |
617 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* & - 87 50 */ |
618 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 88- 95 */ |
619 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* - -103 60 */ |
620 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 104- ? */ |
621 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 112-119 70 */ |
622 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 120- " */ |
623 | 0x00,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x00, /* 128- g 80 */ |
624 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* h -143 */ |
625 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 144- p 90 */ |
626 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* q -159 */ |
627 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 160- x A0 */ |
628 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* y -175 */ |
629 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* ^ -183 B0 */ |
630 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 184-191 */ |
631 | 0x00,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x08,0x00, /* { - G C0 */ |
632 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* H -207 */ |
633 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* } - P D0 */ |
634 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* Q -223 */ |
635 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* \ - X E0 */ |
636 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* Y -239 */ |
637 | 0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c,0x0c, /* 0 - 7 F0 */ |
638 | 0x0c,0x0c,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00};/* 8 -255 */ |
639 | |
640 | static const pcre_uint8 ebcdic_chartab[] = { /* chartable partial dup */ |
641 | 0x80,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x01,0x00,0x00, /* 0- 7 */ |
642 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x01,0x01,0x00,0x00, /* 8- 15 */ |
643 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x01,0x00,0x00, /* 16- 23 */ |
644 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 24- 31 */ |
645 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x01,0x00,0x00, /* 32- 39 */ |
646 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 40- 47 */ |
647 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 48- 55 */ |
648 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 56- 63 */ |
649 | 0x01,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* - 71 */ |
650 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x80,0x00,0x80,0x80,0x80, /* 72- | */ |
651 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* & - 87 */ |
652 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x80,0x80,0x80,0x00,0x00, /* 88- 95 */ |
653 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* - -103 */ |
654 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x10,0x00,0x80, /* 104- ? */ |
655 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 112-119 */ |
656 | 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 120- " */ |
657 | 0x00,0x1a,0x1a,0x1a,0x1a,0x1a,0x1a,0x12, /* 128- g */ |
658 | 0x12,0x12,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* h -143 */ |
659 | 0x00,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12, /* 144- p */ |
660 | 0x12,0x12,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* q -159 */ |
661 | 0x00,0x00,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12, /* 160- x */ |
662 | 0x12,0x12,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* y -175 */ |
663 | 0x80,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* ^ -183 */ |
664 | 0x00,0x00,0x80,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* 184-191 */ |
665 | 0x80,0x1a,0x1a,0x1a,0x1a,0x1a,0x1a,0x12, /* { - G */ |
666 | 0x12,0x12,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* H -207 */ |
667 | 0x00,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12, /* } - P */ |
668 | 0x12,0x12,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* Q -223 */ |
669 | 0x00,0x00,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12,0x12, /* \ - X */ |
670 | 0x12,0x12,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00, /* Y -239 */ |
671 | 0x1c,0x1c,0x1c,0x1c,0x1c,0x1c,0x1c,0x1c, /* 0 - 7 */ |
672 | 0x1c,0x1c,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00};/* 8 -255 */ |
673 | #endif |
674 | |
675 | |
676 | /* This table is used to check whether auto-possessification is possible |
677 | between adjacent character-type opcodes. The left-hand (repeated) opcode is |
678 | used to select the row, and the right-hand opcode is use to select the column. |
679 | A value of 1 means that auto-possessification is OK. For example, the second |
680 | value in the first row means that \D+\d can be turned into \D++\d. |
681 | |
682 | The Unicode property types (\P and \p) have to be present to fill out the table |
683 | because of what their opcode values are, but the table values should always be |
684 | zero because property types are handled separately in the code. The last four |
685 | columns apply to items that cannot be repeated, so there is no need to have |
686 | rows for them. Note that OP_DIGIT etc. are generated only when PCRE_UCP is |
687 | *not* set. When it is set, \d etc. are converted into OP_(NOT_)PROP codes. */ |
688 | |
689 | #define APTROWS (LAST_AUTOTAB_LEFT_OP - FIRST_AUTOTAB_OP + 1) |
690 | #define APTCOLS (LAST_AUTOTAB_RIGHT_OP - FIRST_AUTOTAB_OP + 1) |
691 | |
692 | static const pcre_uint8 autoposstab[APTROWS][APTCOLS] = { |
693 | /* \D \d \S \s \W \w . .+ \C \P \p \R \H \h \V \v \X \Z \z $ $M */ |
694 | { 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \D */ |
695 | { 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, /* \d */ |
696 | { 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, /* \S */ |
697 | { 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \s */ |
698 | { 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \W */ |
699 | { 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, /* \w */ |
700 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* . */ |
701 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* .+ */ |
702 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \C */ |
703 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }, /* \P */ |
704 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }, /* \p */ |
705 | { 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \R */ |
706 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \H */ |
707 | { 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \h */ |
708 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \V */ |
709 | { 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 }, /* \v */ |
710 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0 } /* \X */ |
711 | }; |
712 | |
713 | |
714 | /* This table is used to check whether auto-possessification is possible |
715 | between adjacent Unicode property opcodes (OP_PROP and OP_NOTPROP). The |
716 | left-hand (repeated) opcode is used to select the row, and the right-hand |
717 | opcode is used to select the column. The values are as follows: |
718 | |
719 | 0 Always return FALSE (never auto-possessify) |
720 | 1 Character groups are distinct (possessify if both are OP_PROP) |
721 | 2 Check character categories in the same group (general or particular) |
722 | 3 TRUE if the two opcodes are not the same (PROP vs NOTPROP) |
723 | |
724 | 4 Check left general category vs right particular category |
725 | 5 Check right general category vs left particular category |
726 | |
727 | 6 Left alphanum vs right general category |
728 | 7 Left space vs right general category |
729 | 8 Left word vs right general category |
730 | |
731 | 9 Right alphanum vs left general category |
732 | 10 Right space vs left general category |
733 | 11 Right word vs left general category |
734 | |
735 | 12 Left alphanum vs right particular category |
736 | 13 Left space vs right particular category |
737 | 14 Left word vs right particular category |
738 | |
739 | 15 Right alphanum vs left particular category |
740 | 16 Right space vs left particular category |
741 | 17 Right word vs left particular category |
742 | */ |
743 | |
744 | static const pcre_uint8 propposstab[PT_TABSIZE][PT_TABSIZE] = { |
745 | /* ANY LAMP GC PC SC ALNUM SPACE PXSPACE WORD CLIST UCNC */ |
746 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }, /* PT_ANY */ |
747 | { 0, 3, 0, 0, 0, 3, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0 }, /* PT_LAMP */ |
748 | { 0, 0, 2, 4, 0, 9, 10, 10, 11, 0, 0 }, /* PT_GC */ |
749 | { 0, 0, 5, 2, 0, 15, 16, 16, 17, 0, 0 }, /* PT_PC */ |
750 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 2, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }, /* PT_SC */ |
751 | { 0, 3, 6, 12, 0, 3, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0 }, /* PT_ALNUM */ |
752 | { 0, 1, 7, 13, 0, 1, 3, 3, 1, 0, 0 }, /* PT_SPACE */ |
753 | { 0, 1, 7, 13, 0, 1, 3, 3, 1, 0, 0 }, /* PT_PXSPACE */ |
754 | { 0, 0, 8, 14, 0, 0, 1, 1, 3, 0, 0 }, /* PT_WORD */ |
755 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }, /* PT_CLIST */ |
756 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 3 } /* PT_UCNC */ |
757 | }; |
758 | |
759 | /* This table is used to check whether auto-possessification is possible |
760 | between adjacent Unicode property opcodes (OP_PROP and OP_NOTPROP) when one |
761 | specifies a general category and the other specifies a particular category. The |
762 | row is selected by the general category and the column by the particular |
763 | category. The value is 1 if the particular category is not part of the general |
764 | category. */ |
765 | |
766 | static const pcre_uint8 catposstab[7][30] = { |
767 | /* Cc Cf Cn Co Cs Ll Lm Lo Lt Lu Mc Me Mn Nd Nl No Pc Pd Pe Pf Pi Po Ps Sc Sk Sm So Zl Zp Zs */ |
768 | { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, /* C */ |
769 | { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, /* L */ |
770 | { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, /* M */ |
771 | { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, /* N */ |
772 | { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, /* P */ |
773 | { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1 }, /* S */ |
774 | { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0 } /* Z */ |
775 | }; |
776 | |
777 | /* This table is used when checking ALNUM, (PX)SPACE, SPACE, and WORD against |
778 | a general or particular category. The properties in each row are those |
779 | that apply to the character set in question. Duplication means that a little |
780 | unnecessary work is done when checking, but this keeps things much simpler |
781 | because they can all use the same code. For more details see the comment where |
782 | this table is used. |
783 | |
784 | Note: SPACE and PXSPACE used to be different because Perl excluded VT from |
785 | "space", but from Perl 5.18 it's included, so both categories are treated the |
786 | same here. */ |
787 | |
788 | static const pcre_uint8 posspropstab[3][4] = { |
789 | { ucp_L, ucp_N, ucp_N, ucp_Nl }, /* ALNUM, 3rd and 4th values redundant */ |
790 | { ucp_Z, ucp_Z, ucp_C, ucp_Cc }, /* SPACE and PXSPACE, 2nd value redundant */ |
791 | { ucp_L, ucp_N, ucp_P, ucp_Po } /* WORD */ |
792 | }; |
793 | |
794 | /* This table is used when converting repeating opcodes into possessified |
795 | versions as a result of an explicit possessive quantifier such as ++. A zero |
796 | value means there is no possessified version - in those cases the item in |
797 | question must be wrapped in ONCE brackets. The table is truncated at OP_CALLOUT |
798 | because all relevant opcodes are less than that. */ |
799 | |
800 | static const pcre_uint8 opcode_possessify[] = { |
801 | 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 0 - 15 */ |
802 | 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, /* 16 - 31 */ |
803 | |
804 | 0, /* NOTI */ |
805 | OP_POSSTAR, 0, /* STAR, MINSTAR */ |
806 | OP_POSPLUS, 0, /* PLUS, MINPLUS */ |
807 | OP_POSQUERY, 0, /* QUERY, MINQUERY */ |
808 | OP_POSUPTO, 0, /* UPTO, MINUPTO */ |
809 | 0, /* EXACT */ |
810 | 0, 0, 0, 0, /* POS{STAR,PLUS,QUERY,UPTO} */ |
811 | |
812 | OP_POSSTARI, 0, /* STARI, MINSTARI */ |
813 | OP_POSPLUSI, 0, /* PLUSI, MINPLUSI */ |
814 | OP_POSQUERYI, 0, /* QUERYI, MINQUERYI */ |
815 | OP_POSUPTOI, 0, /* UPTOI, MINUPTOI */ |
816 | 0, /* EXACTI */ |
817 | 0, 0, 0, 0, /* POS{STARI,PLUSI,QUERYI,UPTOI} */ |
818 | |
819 | OP_NOTPOSSTAR, 0, /* NOTSTAR, NOTMINSTAR */ |
820 | OP_NOTPOSPLUS, 0, /* NOTPLUS, NOTMINPLUS */ |
821 | OP_NOTPOSQUERY, 0, /* NOTQUERY, NOTMINQUERY */ |
822 | OP_NOTPOSUPTO, 0, /* NOTUPTO, NOTMINUPTO */ |
823 | 0, /* NOTEXACT */ |
824 | 0, 0, 0, 0, /* NOTPOS{STAR,PLUS,QUERY,UPTO} */ |
825 | |
826 | OP_NOTPOSSTARI, 0, /* NOTSTARI, NOTMINSTARI */ |
827 | OP_NOTPOSPLUSI, 0, /* NOTPLUSI, NOTMINPLUSI */ |
828 | OP_NOTPOSQUERYI, 0, /* NOTQUERYI, NOTMINQUERYI */ |
829 | OP_NOTPOSUPTOI, 0, /* NOTUPTOI, NOTMINUPTOI */ |
830 | 0, /* NOTEXACTI */ |
831 | 0, 0, 0, 0, /* NOTPOS{STARI,PLUSI,QUERYI,UPTOI} */ |
832 | |
833 | OP_TYPEPOSSTAR, 0, /* TYPESTAR, TYPEMINSTAR */ |
834 | OP_TYPEPOSPLUS, 0, /* TYPEPLUS, TYPEMINPLUS */ |
835 | OP_TYPEPOSQUERY, 0, /* TYPEQUERY, TYPEMINQUERY */ |
836 | OP_TYPEPOSUPTO, 0, /* TYPEUPTO, TYPEMINUPTO */ |
837 | 0, /* TYPEEXACT */ |
838 | 0, 0, 0, 0, /* TYPEPOS{STAR,PLUS,QUERY,UPTO} */ |
839 | |
840 | OP_CRPOSSTAR, 0, /* CRSTAR, CRMINSTAR */ |
841 | OP_CRPOSPLUS, 0, /* CRPLUS, CRMINPLUS */ |
842 | OP_CRPOSQUERY, 0, /* CRQUERY, CRMINQUERY */ |
843 | OP_CRPOSRANGE, 0, /* CRRANGE, CRMINRANGE */ |
844 | 0, 0, 0, 0, /* CRPOS{STAR,PLUS,QUERY,RANGE} */ |
845 | |
846 | 0, 0, 0, /* CLASS, NCLASS, XCLASS */ |
847 | 0, 0, /* REF, REFI */ |
848 | 0, 0, /* DNREF, DNREFI */ |
849 | 0, 0 /* RECURSE, CALLOUT */ |
850 | }; |
851 | |
852 | |
853 | |
854 | /************************************************* |
855 | * Find an error text * |
856 | *************************************************/ |
857 | |
858 | /* The error texts are now all in one long string, to save on relocations. As |
859 | some of the text is of unknown length, we can't use a table of offsets. |
860 | Instead, just count through the strings. This is not a performance issue |
861 | because it happens only when there has been a compilation error. |
862 | |
863 | Argument: the error number |
864 | Returns: pointer to the error string |
865 | */ |
866 | |
867 | static const char * |
868 | find_error_text(int n) |
869 | { |
870 | const char *s = error_texts; |
871 | for (; n > 0; n--) |
872 | { |
873 | while (*s++ != CHAR_NULL) {}; |
874 | if (*s == CHAR_NULL) return "Error text not found (please report)"; |
875 | } |
876 | return s; |
877 | } |
878 | |
879 | |
880 | |
881 | /************************************************* |
882 | * Expand the workspace * |
883 | *************************************************/ |
884 | |
885 | /* This function is called during the second compiling phase, if the number of |
886 | forward references fills the existing workspace, which is originally a block on |
887 | the stack. A larger block is obtained from malloc() unless the ultimate limit |
888 | has been reached or the increase will be rather small. |
889 | |
890 | Argument: pointer to the compile data block |
891 | Returns: 0 if all went well, else an error number |
892 | */ |
893 | |
894 | static int |
895 | expand_workspace(compile_data *cd) |
896 | { |
897 | pcre_uchar *newspace; |
898 | int newsize = cd->workspace_size * 2; |
899 | |
900 | if (newsize > COMPILE_WORK_SIZE_MAX) newsize = COMPILE_WORK_SIZE_MAX; |
901 | if (cd->workspace_size >= COMPILE_WORK_SIZE_MAX || |
902 | newsize - cd->workspace_size < WORK_SIZE_SAFETY_MARGIN) |
903 | return ERR72; |
904 | |
905 | newspace = (PUBL(malloc))(IN_UCHARS(newsize)); |
906 | if (newspace == NULL) return ERR21; |
907 | memcpy(newspace, cd->start_workspace, cd->workspace_size * sizeof(pcre_uchar)); |
908 | cd->hwm = (pcre_uchar *)newspace + (cd->hwm - cd->start_workspace); |
909 | if (cd->workspace_size > COMPILE_WORK_SIZE) |
910 | (PUBL(free))((void *)cd->start_workspace); |
911 | cd->start_workspace = newspace; |
912 | cd->workspace_size = newsize; |
913 | return 0; |
914 | } |
915 | |
916 | |
917 | |
918 | /************************************************* |
919 | * Check for counted repeat * |
920 | *************************************************/ |
921 | |
922 | /* This function is called when a '{' is encountered in a place where it might |
923 | start a quantifier. It looks ahead to see if it really is a quantifier or not. |
924 | It is only a quantifier if it is one of the forms {ddd} {ddd,} or {ddd,ddd} |
925 | where the ddds are digits. |
926 | |
927 | Arguments: |
928 | p pointer to the first char after '{' |
929 | |
930 | Returns: TRUE or FALSE |
931 | */ |
932 | |
933 | static BOOL |
934 | is_counted_repeat(const pcre_uchar *p) |
935 | { |
936 | if (!IS_DIGIT(*p)) return FALSE; |
937 | p++; |
938 | while (IS_DIGIT(*p)) p++; |
939 | if (*p == CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) return TRUE; |
940 | |
941 | if (*p++ != CHAR_COMMA) return FALSE; |
942 | if (*p == CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) return TRUE; |
943 | |
944 | if (!IS_DIGIT(*p)) return FALSE; |
945 | p++; |
946 | while (IS_DIGIT(*p)) p++; |
947 | |
948 | return (*p == CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET); |
949 | } |
950 | |
951 | |
952 | |
953 | /************************************************* |
954 | * Handle escapes * |
955 | *************************************************/ |
956 | |
957 | /* This function is called when a \ has been encountered. It either returns a |
958 | positive value for a simple escape such as \n, or 0 for a data character which |
959 | will be placed in chptr. A backreference to group n is returned as negative n. |
960 | When UTF-8 is enabled, a positive value greater than 255 may be returned in |
961 | chptr. On entry, ptr is pointing at the \. On exit, it is on the final |
962 | character of the escape sequence. |
963 | |
964 | Arguments: |
965 | ptrptr points to the pattern position pointer |
966 | chptr points to a returned data character |
967 | errorcodeptr points to the errorcode variable |
968 | bracount number of previous extracting brackets |
969 | options the options bits |
970 | isclass TRUE if inside a character class |
971 | |
972 | Returns: zero => a data character |
973 | positive => a special escape sequence |
974 | negative => a back reference |
975 | on error, errorcodeptr is set |
976 | */ |
977 | |
978 | static int |
979 | check_escape(const pcre_uchar **ptrptr, pcre_uint32 *chptr, int *errorcodeptr, |
980 | int bracount, int options, BOOL isclass) |
981 | { |
982 | /* PCRE_UTF16 has the same value as PCRE_UTF8. */ |
983 | BOOL utf = (options & PCRE_UTF8) != 0; |
984 | const pcre_uchar *ptr = *ptrptr + 1; |
985 | pcre_uint32 c; |
986 | int escape = 0; |
987 | int i; |
988 | |
989 | GETCHARINCTEST(c, ptr); /* Get character value, increment pointer */ |
990 | ptr--; /* Set pointer back to the last byte */ |
991 | |
992 | /* If backslash is at the end of the pattern, it's an error. */ |
993 | |
994 | if (c == CHAR_NULL) *errorcodeptr = ERR1; |
995 | |
996 | /* Non-alphanumerics are literals. For digits or letters, do an initial lookup |
997 | in a table. A non-zero result is something that can be returned immediately. |
998 | Otherwise further processing may be required. */ |
999 | |
1000 | #ifndef EBCDIC /* ASCII/UTF-8 coding */ |
1001 | /* Not alphanumeric */ |
1002 | else if (c < CHAR_0 || c > CHAR_z) {} |
1003 | else if ((i = escapes[c - CHAR_0]) != 0) |
1004 | { if (i > 0) c = (pcre_uint32)i; else escape = -i; } |
1005 | |
1006 | #else /* EBCDIC coding */ |
1007 | /* Not alphanumeric */ |
1008 | else if (c < CHAR_a || (!MAX_255(c) || (ebcdic_chartab[c] & 0x0E) == 0)) {} |
1009 | else if ((i = escapes[c - 0x48]) != 0) { if (i > 0) c = (pcre_uint32)i; else escape = -i; } |
1010 | #endif |
1011 | |
1012 | /* Escapes that need further processing, or are illegal. */ |
1013 | |
1014 | else |
1015 | { |
1016 | const pcre_uchar *oldptr; |
1017 | BOOL braced, negated, overflow; |
1018 | int s; |
1019 | |
1020 | switch (c) |
1021 | { |
1022 | /* A number of Perl escapes are not handled by PCRE. We give an explicit |
1023 | error. */ |
1024 | |
1025 | case CHAR_l: |
1026 | case CHAR_L: |
1027 | *errorcodeptr = ERR37; |
1028 | break; |
1029 | |
1030 | case CHAR_u: |
1031 | if ((options & PCRE_JAVASCRIPT_COMPAT) != 0) |
1032 | { |
1033 | /* In JavaScript, \u must be followed by four hexadecimal numbers. |
1034 | Otherwise it is a lowercase u letter. */ |
1035 | if (MAX_255(ptr[1]) && (digitab[ptr[1]] & ctype_xdigit) != 0 |
1036 | && MAX_255(ptr[2]) && (digitab[ptr[2]] & ctype_xdigit) != 0 |
1037 | && MAX_255(ptr[3]) && (digitab[ptr[3]] & ctype_xdigit) != 0 |
1038 | && MAX_255(ptr[4]) && (digitab[ptr[4]] & ctype_xdigit) != 0) |
1039 | { |
1040 | c = 0; |
1041 | for (i = 0; i < 4; ++i) |
1042 | { |
1043 | register pcre_uint32 cc = *(++ptr); |
1044 | #ifndef EBCDIC /* ASCII/UTF-8 coding */ |
1045 | if (cc >= CHAR_a) cc -= 32; /* Convert to upper case */ |
1046 | c = (c << 4) + cc - ((cc < CHAR_A)? CHAR_0 : (CHAR_A - 10)); |
1047 | #else /* EBCDIC coding */ |
1048 | if (cc >= CHAR_a && cc <= CHAR_z) cc += 64; /* Convert to upper case */ |
1049 | c = (c << 4) + cc - ((cc >= CHAR_0)? CHAR_0 : (CHAR_A - 10)); |
1050 | #endif |
1051 | } |
1052 | |
1053 | #if defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
1054 | if (c > (utf ? 0x10ffffU : 0xffU)) |
1055 | #elif defined COMPILE_PCRE16 |
1056 | if (c > (utf ? 0x10ffffU : 0xffffU)) |
1057 | #elif defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
1058 | if (utf && c > 0x10ffffU) |
1059 | #endif |
1060 | { |
1061 | *errorcodeptr = ERR76; |
1062 | } |
1063 | else if (utf && c >= 0xd800 && c <= 0xdfff) *errorcodeptr = ERR73; |
1064 | } |
1065 | } |
1066 | else |
1067 | *errorcodeptr = ERR37; |
1068 | break; |
1069 | |
1070 | case CHAR_U: |
1071 | /* In JavaScript, \U is an uppercase U letter. */ |
1072 | if ((options & PCRE_JAVASCRIPT_COMPAT) == 0) *errorcodeptr = ERR37; |
1073 | break; |
1074 | |
1075 | /* In a character class, \g is just a literal "g". Outside a character |
1076 | class, \g must be followed by one of a number of specific things: |
1077 | |
1078 | (1) A number, either plain or braced. If positive, it is an absolute |
1079 | backreference. If negative, it is a relative backreference. This is a Perl |
1080 | 5.10 feature. |
1081 | |
1082 | (2) Perl 5.10 also supports \g{name} as a reference to a named group. This |
1083 | is part of Perl's movement towards a unified syntax for back references. As |
1084 | this is synonymous with \k{name}, we fudge it up by pretending it really |
1085 | was \k. |
1086 | |
1087 | (3) For Oniguruma compatibility we also support \g followed by a name or a |
1088 | number either in angle brackets or in single quotes. However, these are |
1089 | (possibly recursive) subroutine calls, _not_ backreferences. Just return |
1090 | the ESC_g code (cf \k). */ |
1091 | |
1092 | case CHAR_g: |
1093 | if (isclass) break; |
1094 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_LESS_THAN_SIGN || ptr[1] == CHAR_APOSTROPHE) |
1095 | { |
1096 | escape = ESC_g; |
1097 | break; |
1098 | } |
1099 | |
1100 | /* Handle the Perl-compatible cases */ |
1101 | |
1102 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET) |
1103 | { |
1104 | const pcre_uchar *p; |
1105 | for (p = ptr+2; *p != CHAR_NULL && *p != CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET; p++) |
1106 | if (*p != CHAR_MINUS && !IS_DIGIT(*p)) break; |
1107 | if (*p != CHAR_NULL && *p != CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) |
1108 | { |
1109 | escape = ESC_k; |
1110 | break; |
1111 | } |
1112 | braced = TRUE; |
1113 | ptr++; |
1114 | } |
1115 | else braced = FALSE; |
1116 | |
1117 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_MINUS) |
1118 | { |
1119 | negated = TRUE; |
1120 | ptr++; |
1121 | } |
1122 | else negated = FALSE; |
1123 | |
1124 | /* The integer range is limited by the machine's int representation. */ |
1125 | s = 0; |
1126 | overflow = FALSE; |
1127 | while (IS_DIGIT(ptr[1])) |
1128 | { |
1129 | if (s > INT_MAX / 10 - 1) /* Integer overflow */ |
1130 | { |
1131 | overflow = TRUE; |
1132 | break; |
1133 | } |
1134 | s = s * 10 + (int)(*(++ptr) - CHAR_0); |
1135 | } |
1136 | if (overflow) /* Integer overflow */ |
1137 | { |
1138 | while (IS_DIGIT(ptr[1])) |
1139 | ptr++; |
1140 | *errorcodeptr = ERR61; |
1141 | break; |
1142 | } |
1143 | |
1144 | if (braced && *(++ptr) != CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) |
1145 | { |
1146 | *errorcodeptr = ERR57; |
1147 | break; |
1148 | } |
1149 | |
1150 | if (s == 0) |
1151 | { |
1152 | *errorcodeptr = ERR58; |
1153 | break; |
1154 | } |
1155 | |
1156 | if (negated) |
1157 | { |
1158 | if (s > bracount) |
1159 | { |
1160 | *errorcodeptr = ERR15; |
1161 | break; |
1162 | } |
1163 | s = bracount - (s - 1); |
1164 | } |
1165 | |
1166 | escape = -s; |
1167 | break; |
1168 | |
1169 | /* The handling of escape sequences consisting of a string of digits |
1170 | starting with one that is not zero is not straightforward. Perl has changed |
1171 | over the years. Nowadays \g{} for backreferences and \o{} for octal are |
1172 | recommended to avoid the ambiguities in the old syntax. |
1173 | |
1174 | Outside a character class, the digits are read as a decimal number. If the |
1175 | number is less than 8 (used to be 10), or if there are that many previous |
1176 | extracting left brackets, then it is a back reference. Otherwise, up to |
1177 | three octal digits are read to form an escaped byte. Thus \123 is likely to |
1178 | be octal 123 (cf \0123, which is octal 012 followed by the literal 3). If |
1179 | the octal value is greater than 377, the least significant 8 bits are |
1180 | taken. \8 and \9 are treated as the literal characters 8 and 9. |
1181 | |
1182 | Inside a character class, \ followed by a digit is always either a literal |
1183 | 8 or 9 or an octal number. */ |
1184 | |
1185 | case CHAR_1: case CHAR_2: case CHAR_3: case CHAR_4: case CHAR_5: |
1186 | case CHAR_6: case CHAR_7: case CHAR_8: case CHAR_9: |
1187 | |
1188 | if (!isclass) |
1189 | { |
1190 | oldptr = ptr; |
1191 | /* The integer range is limited by the machine's int representation. */ |
1192 | s = (int)(c -CHAR_0); |
1193 | overflow = FALSE; |
1194 | while (IS_DIGIT(ptr[1])) |
1195 | { |
1196 | if (s > INT_MAX / 10 - 1) /* Integer overflow */ |
1197 | { |
1198 | overflow = TRUE; |
1199 | break; |
1200 | } |
1201 | s = s * 10 + (int)(*(++ptr) - CHAR_0); |
1202 | } |
1203 | if (overflow) /* Integer overflow */ |
1204 | { |
1205 | while (IS_DIGIT(ptr[1])) |
1206 | ptr++; |
1207 | *errorcodeptr = ERR61; |
1208 | break; |
1209 | } |
1210 | if (s < 8 || s <= bracount) /* Check for back reference */ |
1211 | { |
1212 | escape = -s; |
1213 | break; |
1214 | } |
1215 | ptr = oldptr; /* Put the pointer back and fall through */ |
1216 | } |
1217 | |
1218 | /* Handle a digit following \ when the number is not a back reference. If |
1219 | the first digit is 8 or 9, Perl used to generate a binary zero byte and |
1220 | then treat the digit as a following literal. At least by Perl 5.18 this |
1221 | changed so as not to insert the binary zero. */ |
1222 | |
1223 | if ((c = *ptr) >= CHAR_8) break; |
1224 | |
1225 | /* Fall through with a digit less than 8 */ |
1226 | |
1227 | /* \0 always starts an octal number, but we may drop through to here with a |
1228 | larger first octal digit. The original code used just to take the least |
1229 | significant 8 bits of octal numbers (I think this is what early Perls used |
1230 | to do). Nowadays we allow for larger numbers in UTF-8 mode and 16-bit mode, |
1231 | but no more than 3 octal digits. */ |
1232 | |
1233 | case CHAR_0: |
1234 | c -= CHAR_0; |
1235 | while(i++ < 2 && ptr[1] >= CHAR_0 && ptr[1] <= CHAR_7) |
1236 | c = c * 8 + *(++ptr) - CHAR_0; |
1237 | #ifdef COMPILE_PCRE8 |
1238 | if (!utf && c > 0xff) *errorcodeptr = ERR51; |
1239 | #endif |
1240 | break; |
1241 | |
1242 | /* \o is a relatively new Perl feature, supporting a more general way of |
1243 | specifying character codes in octal. The only supported form is \o{ddd}. */ |
1244 | |
1245 | case CHAR_o: |
1246 | if (ptr[1] != CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET) *errorcodeptr = ERR81; else |
1247 | { |
1248 | ptr += 2; |
1249 | c = 0; |
1250 | overflow = FALSE; |
1251 | while (*ptr >= CHAR_0 && *ptr <= CHAR_7) |
1252 | { |
1253 | register pcre_uint32 cc = *ptr++; |
1254 | if (c == 0 && cc == CHAR_0) continue; /* Leading zeroes */ |
1255 | #ifdef COMPILE_PCRE32 |
1256 | if (c >= 0x20000000l) { overflow = TRUE; break; } |
1257 | #endif |
1258 | c = (c << 3) + cc - CHAR_0 ; |
1259 | #if defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
1260 | if (c > (utf ? 0x10ffffU : 0xffU)) { overflow = TRUE; break; } |
1261 | #elif defined COMPILE_PCRE16 |
1262 | if (c > (utf ? 0x10ffffU : 0xffffU)) { overflow = TRUE; break; } |
1263 | #elif defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
1264 | if (utf && c > 0x10ffffU) { overflow = TRUE; break; } |
1265 | #endif |
1266 | } |
1267 | if (overflow) |
1268 | { |
1269 | while (*ptr >= CHAR_0 && *ptr <= CHAR_7) ptr++; |
1270 | *errorcodeptr = ERR34; |
1271 | } |
1272 | else if (*ptr == CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) |
1273 | { |
1274 | if (utf && c >= 0xd800 && c <= 0xdfff) *errorcodeptr = ERR73; |
1275 | } |
1276 | else *errorcodeptr = ERR80; |
1277 | } |
1278 | break; |
1279 | |
1280 | /* \x is complicated. In JavaScript, \x must be followed by two hexadecimal |
1281 | numbers. Otherwise it is a lowercase x letter. */ |
1282 | |
1283 | case CHAR_x: |
1284 | if ((options & PCRE_JAVASCRIPT_COMPAT) != 0) |
1285 | { |
1286 | if (MAX_255(ptr[1]) && (digitab[ptr[1]] & ctype_xdigit) != 0 |
1287 | && MAX_255(ptr[2]) && (digitab[ptr[2]] & ctype_xdigit) != 0) |
1288 | { |
1289 | c = 0; |
1290 | for (i = 0; i < 2; ++i) |
1291 | { |
1292 | register pcre_uint32 cc = *(++ptr); |
1293 | #ifndef EBCDIC /* ASCII/UTF-8 coding */ |
1294 | if (cc >= CHAR_a) cc -= 32; /* Convert to upper case */ |
1295 | c = (c << 4) + cc - ((cc < CHAR_A)? CHAR_0 : (CHAR_A - 10)); |
1296 | #else /* EBCDIC coding */ |
1297 | if (cc >= CHAR_a && cc <= CHAR_z) cc += 64; /* Convert to upper case */ |
1298 | c = (c << 4) + cc - ((cc >= CHAR_0)? CHAR_0 : (CHAR_A - 10)); |
1299 | #endif |
1300 | } |
1301 | } |
1302 | } /* End JavaScript handling */ |
1303 | |
1304 | /* Handle \x in Perl's style. \x{ddd} is a character number which can be |
1305 | greater than 0xff in utf or non-8bit mode, but only if the ddd are hex |
1306 | digits. If not, { used to be treated as a data character. However, Perl |
1307 | seems to read hex digits up to the first non-such, and ignore the rest, so |
1308 | that, for example \x{zz} matches a binary zero. This seems crazy, so PCRE |
1309 | now gives an error. */ |
1310 | |
1311 | else |
1312 | { |
1313 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET) |
1314 | { |
1315 | ptr += 2; |
1316 | c = 0; |
1317 | overflow = FALSE; |
1318 | while (MAX_255(*ptr) && (digitab[*ptr] & ctype_xdigit) != 0) |
1319 | { |
1320 | register pcre_uint32 cc = *ptr++; |
1321 | if (c == 0 && cc == CHAR_0) continue; /* Leading zeroes */ |
1322 | |
1323 | #ifdef COMPILE_PCRE32 |
1324 | if (c >= 0x10000000l) { overflow = TRUE; break; } |
1325 | #endif |
1326 | |
1327 | #ifndef EBCDIC /* ASCII/UTF-8 coding */ |
1328 | if (cc >= CHAR_a) cc -= 32; /* Convert to upper case */ |
1329 | c = (c << 4) + cc - ((cc < CHAR_A)? CHAR_0 : (CHAR_A - 10)); |
1330 | #else /* EBCDIC coding */ |
1331 | if (cc >= CHAR_a && cc <= CHAR_z) cc += 64; /* Convert to upper case */ |
1332 | c = (c << 4) + cc - ((cc >= CHAR_0)? CHAR_0 : (CHAR_A - 10)); |
1333 | #endif |
1334 | |
1335 | #if defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
1336 | if (c > (utf ? 0x10ffffU : 0xffU)) { overflow = TRUE; break; } |
1337 | #elif defined COMPILE_PCRE16 |
1338 | if (c > (utf ? 0x10ffffU : 0xffffU)) { overflow = TRUE; break; } |
1339 | #elif defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
1340 | if (utf && c > 0x10ffffU) { overflow = TRUE; break; } |
1341 | #endif |
1342 | } |
1343 | |
1344 | if (overflow) |
1345 | { |
1346 | while (MAX_255(*ptr) && (digitab[*ptr] & ctype_xdigit) != 0) ptr++; |
1347 | *errorcodeptr = ERR34; |
1348 | } |
1349 | |
1350 | else if (*ptr == CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) |
1351 | { |
1352 | if (utf && c >= 0xd800 && c <= 0xdfff) *errorcodeptr = ERR73; |
1353 | } |
1354 | |
1355 | /* If the sequence of hex digits does not end with '}', give an error. |
1356 | We used just to recognize this construct and fall through to the normal |
1357 | \x handling, but nowadays Perl gives an error, which seems much more |
1358 | sensible, so we do too. */ |
1359 | |
1360 | else *errorcodeptr = ERR79; |
1361 | } /* End of \x{} processing */ |
1362 | |
1363 | /* Read a single-byte hex-defined char (up to two hex digits after \x) */ |
1364 | |
1365 | else |
1366 | { |
1367 | c = 0; |
1368 | while (i++ < 2 && MAX_255(ptr[1]) && (digitab[ptr[1]] & ctype_xdigit) != 0) |
1369 | { |
1370 | pcre_uint32 cc; /* Some compilers don't like */ |
1371 | cc = *(++ptr); /* ++ in initializers */ |
1372 | #ifndef EBCDIC /* ASCII/UTF-8 coding */ |
1373 | if (cc >= CHAR_a) cc -= 32; /* Convert to upper case */ |
1374 | c = c * 16 + cc - ((cc < CHAR_A)? CHAR_0 : (CHAR_A - 10)); |
1375 | #else /* EBCDIC coding */ |
1376 | if (cc <= CHAR_z) cc += 64; /* Convert to upper case */ |
1377 | c = c * 16 + cc - ((cc >= CHAR_0)? CHAR_0 : (CHAR_A - 10)); |
1378 | #endif |
1379 | } |
1380 | } /* End of \xdd handling */ |
1381 | } /* End of Perl-style \x handling */ |
1382 | break; |
1383 | |
1384 | /* For \c, a following letter is upper-cased; then the 0x40 bit is flipped. |
1385 | An error is given if the byte following \c is not an ASCII character. This |
1386 | coding is ASCII-specific, but then the whole concept of \cx is |
1387 | ASCII-specific. (However, an EBCDIC equivalent has now been added.) */ |
1388 | |
1389 | case CHAR_c: |
1390 | c = *(++ptr); |
1391 | if (c == CHAR_NULL) |
1392 | { |
1393 | *errorcodeptr = ERR2; |
1394 | break; |
1395 | } |
1396 | #ifndef EBCDIC /* ASCII/UTF-8 coding */ |
1397 | if (c > 127) /* Excludes all non-ASCII in either mode */ |
1398 | { |
1399 | *errorcodeptr = ERR68; |
1400 | break; |
1401 | } |
1402 | if (c >= CHAR_a && c <= CHAR_z) c -= 32; |
1403 | c ^= 0x40; |
1404 | #else /* EBCDIC coding */ |
1405 | if (c >= CHAR_a && c <= CHAR_z) c += 64; |
1406 | c ^= 0xC0; |
1407 | #endif |
1408 | break; |
1409 | |
1410 | /* PCRE_EXTRA enables extensions to Perl in the matter of escapes. Any |
1411 | other alphanumeric following \ is an error if PCRE_EXTRA was set; |
1412 | otherwise, for Perl compatibility, it is a literal. This code looks a bit |
1413 | odd, but there used to be some cases other than the default, and there may |
1414 | be again in future, so I haven't "optimized" it. */ |
1415 | |
1416 | default: |
1417 | if ((options & PCRE_EXTRA) != 0) switch(c) |
1418 | { |
1419 | default: |
1420 | *errorcodeptr = ERR3; |
1421 | break; |
1422 | } |
1423 | break; |
1424 | } |
1425 | } |
1426 | |
1427 | /* Perl supports \N{name} for character names, as well as plain \N for "not |
1428 | newline". PCRE does not support \N{name}. However, it does support |
1429 | quantification such as \N{2,3}. */ |
1430 | |
1431 | if (escape == ESC_N && ptr[1] == CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET && |
1432 | !is_counted_repeat(ptr+2)) |
1433 | *errorcodeptr = ERR37; |
1434 | |
1435 | /* If PCRE_UCP is set, we change the values for \d etc. */ |
1436 | |
1437 | if ((options & PCRE_UCP) != 0 && escape >= ESC_D && escape <= ESC_w) |
1438 | escape += (ESC_DU - ESC_D); |
1439 | |
1440 | /* Set the pointer to the final character before returning. */ |
1441 | |
1442 | *ptrptr = ptr; |
1443 | *chptr = c; |
1444 | return escape; |
1445 | } |
1446 | |
1447 | |
1448 | |
1449 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
1450 | /************************************************* |
1451 | * Handle \P and \p * |
1452 | *************************************************/ |
1453 | |
1454 | /* This function is called after \P or \p has been encountered, provided that |
1455 | PCRE is compiled with support for Unicode properties. On entry, ptrptr is |
1456 | pointing at the P or p. On exit, it is pointing at the final character of the |
1457 | escape sequence. |
1458 | |
1459 | Argument: |
1460 | ptrptr points to the pattern position pointer |
1461 | negptr points to a boolean that is set TRUE for negation else FALSE |
1462 | ptypeptr points to an unsigned int that is set to the type value |
1463 | pdataptr points to an unsigned int that is set to the detailed property value |
1464 | errorcodeptr points to the error code variable |
1465 | |
1466 | Returns: TRUE if the type value was found, or FALSE for an invalid type |
1467 | */ |
1468 | |
1469 | static BOOL |
1470 | get_ucp(const pcre_uchar **ptrptr, BOOL *negptr, unsigned int *ptypeptr, |
1471 | unsigned int *pdataptr, int *errorcodeptr) |
1472 | { |
1473 | pcre_uchar c; |
1474 | int i, bot, top; |
1475 | const pcre_uchar *ptr = *ptrptr; |
1476 | pcre_uchar name[32]; |
1477 | |
1478 | c = *(++ptr); |
1479 | if (c == CHAR_NULL) goto ERROR_RETURN; |
1480 | |
1481 | *negptr = FALSE; |
1482 | |
1483 | /* \P or \p can be followed by a name in {}, optionally preceded by ^ for |
1484 | negation. */ |
1485 | |
1486 | if (c == CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET) |
1487 | { |
1488 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_CIRCUMFLEX_ACCENT) |
1489 | { |
1490 | *negptr = TRUE; |
1491 | ptr++; |
1492 | } |
1493 | for (i = 0; i < (int)(sizeof(name) / sizeof(pcre_uchar)) - 1; i++) |
1494 | { |
1495 | c = *(++ptr); |
1496 | if (c == CHAR_NULL) goto ERROR_RETURN; |
1497 | if (c == CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) break; |
1498 | name[i] = c; |
1499 | } |
1500 | if (c != CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) goto ERROR_RETURN; |
1501 | name[i] = 0; |
1502 | } |
1503 | |
1504 | /* Otherwise there is just one following character */ |
1505 | |
1506 | else |
1507 | { |
1508 | name[0] = c; |
1509 | name[1] = 0; |
1510 | } |
1511 | |
1512 | *ptrptr = ptr; |
1513 | |
1514 | /* Search for a recognized property name using binary chop */ |
1515 | |
1516 | bot = 0; |
1517 | top = PRIV(utt_size); |
1518 | |
1519 | while (bot < top) |
1520 | { |
1521 | int r; |
1522 | i = (bot + top) >> 1; |
1523 | r = STRCMP_UC_C8(name, PRIV(utt_names) + PRIV(utt)[i].name_offset); |
1524 | if (r == 0) |
1525 | { |
1526 | *ptypeptr = PRIV(utt)[i].type; |
1527 | *pdataptr = PRIV(utt)[i].value; |
1528 | return TRUE; |
1529 | } |
1530 | if (r > 0) bot = i + 1; else top = i; |
1531 | } |
1532 | |
1533 | *errorcodeptr = ERR47; |
1534 | *ptrptr = ptr; |
1535 | return FALSE; |
1536 | |
1537 | ERROR_RETURN: |
1538 | *errorcodeptr = ERR46; |
1539 | *ptrptr = ptr; |
1540 | return FALSE; |
1541 | } |
1542 | #endif |
1543 | |
1544 | |
1545 | |
1546 | /************************************************* |
1547 | * Read repeat counts * |
1548 | *************************************************/ |
1549 | |
1550 | /* Read an item of the form {n,m} and return the values. This is called only |
1551 | after is_counted_repeat() has confirmed that a repeat-count quantifier exists, |
1552 | so the syntax is guaranteed to be correct, but we need to check the values. |
1553 | |
1554 | Arguments: |
1555 | p pointer to first char after '{' |
1556 | minp pointer to int for min |
1557 | maxp pointer to int for max |
1558 | returned as -1 if no max |
1559 | errorcodeptr points to error code variable |
1560 | |
1561 | Returns: pointer to '}' on success; |
1562 | current ptr on error, with errorcodeptr set non-zero |
1563 | */ |
1564 | |
1565 | static const pcre_uchar * |
1566 | read_repeat_counts(const pcre_uchar *p, int *minp, int *maxp, int *errorcodeptr) |
1567 | { |
1568 | int min = 0; |
1569 | int max = -1; |
1570 | |
1571 | /* Read the minimum value and do a paranoid check: a negative value indicates |
1572 | an integer overflow. */ |
1573 | |
1574 | while (IS_DIGIT(*p)) min = min * 10 + (int)(*p++ - CHAR_0); |
1575 | if (min < 0 || min > 65535) |
1576 | { |
1577 | *errorcodeptr = ERR5; |
1578 | return p; |
1579 | } |
1580 | |
1581 | /* Read the maximum value if there is one, and again do a paranoid on its size. |
1582 | Also, max must not be less than min. */ |
1583 | |
1584 | if (*p == CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) max = min; else |
1585 | { |
1586 | if (*(++p) != CHAR_RIGHT_CURLY_BRACKET) |
1587 | { |
1588 | max = 0; |
1589 | while(IS_DIGIT(*p)) max = max * 10 + (int)(*p++ - CHAR_0); |
1590 | if (max < 0 || max > 65535) |
1591 | { |
1592 | *errorcodeptr = ERR5; |
1593 | return p; |
1594 | } |
1595 | if (max < min) |
1596 | { |
1597 | *errorcodeptr = ERR4; |
1598 | return p; |
1599 | } |
1600 | } |
1601 | } |
1602 | |
1603 | /* Fill in the required variables, and pass back the pointer to the terminating |
1604 | '}'. */ |
1605 | |
1606 | *minp = min; |
1607 | *maxp = max; |
1608 | return p; |
1609 | } |
1610 | |
1611 | |
1612 | |
1613 | /************************************************* |
1614 | * Find first significant op code * |
1615 | *************************************************/ |
1616 | |
1617 | /* This is called by several functions that scan a compiled expression looking |
1618 | for a fixed first character, or an anchoring op code etc. It skips over things |
1619 | that do not influence this. For some calls, it makes sense to skip negative |
1620 | forward and all backward assertions, and also the \b assertion; for others it |
1621 | does not. |
1622 | |
1623 | Arguments: |
1624 | code pointer to the start of the group |
1625 | skipassert TRUE if certain assertions are to be skipped |
1626 | |
1627 | Returns: pointer to the first significant opcode |
1628 | */ |
1629 | |
1630 | static const pcre_uchar* |
1631 | first_significant_code(const pcre_uchar *code, BOOL skipassert) |
1632 | { |
1633 | for (;;) |
1634 | { |
1635 | switch ((int)*code) |
1636 | { |
1637 | case OP_ASSERT_NOT: |
1638 | case OP_ASSERTBACK: |
1639 | case OP_ASSERTBACK_NOT: |
1640 | if (!skipassert) return code; |
1641 | do code += GET(code, 1); while (*code == OP_ALT); |
1642 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[*code]; |
1643 | break; |
1644 | |
1645 | case OP_WORD_BOUNDARY: |
1646 | case OP_NOT_WORD_BOUNDARY: |
1647 | if (!skipassert) return code; |
1648 | /* Fall through */ |
1649 | |
1650 | case OP_CALLOUT: |
1651 | case OP_CREF: |
1652 | case OP_DNCREF: |
1653 | case OP_RREF: |
1654 | case OP_DNRREF: |
1655 | case OP_DEF: |
1656 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[*code]; |
1657 | break; |
1658 | |
1659 | default: |
1660 | return code; |
1661 | } |
1662 | } |
1663 | /* Control never reaches here */ |
1664 | } |
1665 | |
1666 | |
1667 | |
1668 | /************************************************* |
1669 | * Find the fixed length of a branch * |
1670 | *************************************************/ |
1671 | |
1672 | /* Scan a branch and compute the fixed length of subject that will match it, |
1673 | if the length is fixed. This is needed for dealing with backward assertions. |
1674 | In UTF8 mode, the result is in characters rather than bytes. The branch is |
1675 | temporarily terminated with OP_END when this function is called. |
1676 | |
1677 | This function is called when a backward assertion is encountered, so that if it |
1678 | fails, the error message can point to the correct place in the pattern. |
1679 | However, we cannot do this when the assertion contains subroutine calls, |
1680 | because they can be forward references. We solve this by remembering this case |
1681 | and doing the check at the end; a flag specifies which mode we are running in. |
1682 | |
1683 | Arguments: |
1684 | code points to the start of the pattern (the bracket) |
1685 | utf TRUE in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
1686 | atend TRUE if called when the pattern is complete |
1687 | cd the "compile data" structure |
1688 | |
1689 | Returns: the fixed length, |
1690 | or -1 if there is no fixed length, |
1691 | or -2 if \C was encountered (in UTF-8 mode only) |
1692 | or -3 if an OP_RECURSE item was encountered and atend is FALSE |
1693 | or -4 if an unknown opcode was encountered (internal error) |
1694 | */ |
1695 | |
1696 | static int |
1697 | find_fixedlength(pcre_uchar *code, BOOL utf, BOOL atend, compile_data *cd) |
1698 | { |
1699 | int length = -1; |
1700 | |
1701 | register int branchlength = 0; |
1702 | register pcre_uchar *cc = code + 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
1703 | |
1704 | /* Scan along the opcodes for this branch. If we get to the end of the |
1705 | branch, check the length against that of the other branches. */ |
1706 | |
1707 | for (;;) |
1708 | { |
1709 | int d; |
1710 | pcre_uchar *ce, *cs; |
1711 | register pcre_uchar op = *cc; |
1712 | |
1713 | switch (op) |
1714 | { |
1715 | /* We only need to continue for OP_CBRA (normal capturing bracket) and |
1716 | OP_BRA (normal non-capturing bracket) because the other variants of these |
1717 | opcodes are all concerned with unlimited repeated groups, which of course |
1718 | are not of fixed length. */ |
1719 | |
1720 | case OP_CBRA: |
1721 | case OP_BRA: |
1722 | case OP_ONCE: |
1723 | case OP_ONCE_NC: |
1724 | case OP_COND: |
1725 | d = find_fixedlength(cc + ((op == OP_CBRA)? IMM2_SIZE : 0), utf, atend, cd); |
1726 | if (d < 0) return d; |
1727 | branchlength += d; |
1728 | do cc += GET(cc, 1); while (*cc == OP_ALT); |
1729 | cc += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
1730 | break; |
1731 | |
1732 | /* Reached end of a branch; if it's a ket it is the end of a nested call. |
1733 | If it's ALT it is an alternation in a nested call. An ACCEPT is effectively |
1734 | an ALT. If it is END it's the end of the outer call. All can be handled by |
1735 | the same code. Note that we must not include the OP_KETRxxx opcodes here, |
1736 | because they all imply an unlimited repeat. */ |
1737 | |
1738 | case OP_ALT: |
1739 | case OP_KET: |
1740 | case OP_END: |
1741 | case OP_ACCEPT: |
1742 | case OP_ASSERT_ACCEPT: |
1743 | if (length < 0) length = branchlength; |
1744 | else if (length != branchlength) return -1; |
1745 | if (*cc != OP_ALT) return length; |
1746 | cc += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
1747 | branchlength = 0; |
1748 | break; |
1749 | |
1750 | /* A true recursion implies not fixed length, but a subroutine call may |
1751 | be OK. If the subroutine is a forward reference, we can't deal with |
1752 | it until the end of the pattern, so return -3. */ |
1753 | |
1754 | case OP_RECURSE: |
1755 | if (!atend) return -3; |
1756 | cs = ce = (pcre_uchar *)cd->start_code + GET(cc, 1); /* Start subpattern */ |
1757 | do ce += GET(ce, 1); while (*ce == OP_ALT); /* End subpattern */ |
1758 | if (cc > cs && cc < ce) return -1; /* Recursion */ |
1759 | d = find_fixedlength(cs + IMM2_SIZE, utf, atend, cd); |
1760 | if (d < 0) return d; |
1761 | branchlength += d; |
1762 | cc += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
1763 | break; |
1764 | |
1765 | /* Skip over assertive subpatterns */ |
1766 | |
1767 | case OP_ASSERT: |
1768 | case OP_ASSERT_NOT: |
1769 | case OP_ASSERTBACK: |
1770 | case OP_ASSERTBACK_NOT: |
1771 | do cc += GET(cc, 1); while (*cc == OP_ALT); |
1772 | cc += PRIV(OP_lengths)[*cc]; |
1773 | break; |
1774 | |
1775 | /* Skip over things that don't match chars */ |
1776 | |
1777 | case OP_MARK: |
1778 | case OP_PRUNE_ARG: |
1779 | case OP_SKIP_ARG: |
1780 | case OP_THEN_ARG: |
1781 | cc += cc[1] + PRIV(OP_lengths)[*cc]; |
1782 | break; |
1783 | |
1784 | case OP_CALLOUT: |
1785 | case OP_CIRC: |
1786 | case OP_CIRCM: |
1787 | case OP_CLOSE: |
1788 | case OP_COMMIT: |
1789 | case OP_CREF: |
1790 | case OP_DEF: |
1791 | case OP_DNCREF: |
1792 | case OP_DNRREF: |
1793 | case OP_DOLL: |
1794 | case OP_DOLLM: |
1795 | case OP_EOD: |
1796 | case OP_EODN: |
1797 | case OP_FAIL: |
1798 | case OP_NOT_WORD_BOUNDARY: |
1799 | case OP_PRUNE: |
1800 | case OP_REVERSE: |
1801 | case OP_RREF: |
1802 | case OP_SET_SOM: |
1803 | case OP_SKIP: |
1804 | case OP_SOD: |
1805 | case OP_SOM: |
1806 | case OP_THEN: |
1807 | case OP_WORD_BOUNDARY: |
1808 | cc += PRIV(OP_lengths)[*cc]; |
1809 | break; |
1810 | |
1811 | /* Handle literal characters */ |
1812 | |
1813 | case OP_CHAR: |
1814 | case OP_CHARI: |
1815 | case OP_NOT: |
1816 | case OP_NOTI: |
1817 | branchlength++; |
1818 | cc += 2; |
1819 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
1820 | if (utf && HAS_EXTRALEN(cc[-1])) cc += GET_EXTRALEN(cc[-1]); |
1821 | #endif |
1822 | break; |
1823 | |
1824 | /* Handle exact repetitions. The count is already in characters, but we |
1825 | need to skip over a multibyte character in UTF8 mode. */ |
1826 | |
1827 | case OP_EXACT: |
1828 | case OP_EXACTI: |
1829 | case OP_NOTEXACT: |
1830 | case OP_NOTEXACTI: |
1831 | branchlength += (int)GET2(cc,1); |
1832 | cc += 2 + IMM2_SIZE; |
1833 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
1834 | if (utf && HAS_EXTRALEN(cc[-1])) cc += GET_EXTRALEN(cc[-1]); |
1835 | #endif |
1836 | break; |
1837 | |
1838 | case OP_TYPEEXACT: |
1839 | branchlength += GET2(cc,1); |
1840 | if (cc[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_PROP || cc[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_NOTPROP) |
1841 | cc += 2; |
1842 | cc += 1 + IMM2_SIZE + 1; |
1843 | break; |
1844 | |
1845 | /* Handle single-char matchers */ |
1846 | |
1847 | case OP_PROP: |
1848 | case OP_NOTPROP: |
1849 | cc += 2; |
1850 | /* Fall through */ |
1851 | |
1852 | case OP_HSPACE: |
1853 | case OP_VSPACE: |
1854 | case OP_NOT_HSPACE: |
1855 | case OP_NOT_VSPACE: |
1856 | case OP_NOT_DIGIT: |
1857 | case OP_DIGIT: |
1858 | case OP_NOT_WHITESPACE: |
1859 | case OP_WHITESPACE: |
1860 | case OP_NOT_WORDCHAR: |
1861 | case OP_WORDCHAR: |
1862 | case OP_ANY: |
1863 | case OP_ALLANY: |
1864 | branchlength++; |
1865 | cc++; |
1866 | break; |
1867 | |
1868 | /* The single-byte matcher isn't allowed. This only happens in UTF-8 mode; |
1869 | otherwise \C is coded as OP_ALLANY. */ |
1870 | |
1871 | case OP_ANYBYTE: |
1872 | return -2; |
1873 | |
1874 | /* Check a class for variable quantification */ |
1875 | |
1876 | case OP_CLASS: |
1877 | case OP_NCLASS: |
1878 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || defined COMPILE_PCRE16 || defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
1879 | case OP_XCLASS: |
1880 | /* The original code caused an unsigned overflow in 64 bit systems, |
1881 | so now we use a conditional statement. */ |
1882 | if (op == OP_XCLASS) |
1883 | cc += GET(cc, 1); |
1884 | else |
1885 | cc += PRIV(OP_lengths)[OP_CLASS]; |
1886 | #else |
1887 | cc += PRIV(OP_lengths)[OP_CLASS]; |
1888 | #endif |
1889 | |
1890 | switch (*cc) |
1891 | { |
1892 | case OP_CRSTAR: |
1893 | case OP_CRMINSTAR: |
1894 | case OP_CRPLUS: |
1895 | case OP_CRMINPLUS: |
1896 | case OP_CRQUERY: |
1897 | case OP_CRMINQUERY: |
1898 | case OP_CRPOSSTAR: |
1899 | case OP_CRPOSPLUS: |
1900 | case OP_CRPOSQUERY: |
1901 | return -1; |
1902 | |
1903 | case OP_CRRANGE: |
1904 | case OP_CRMINRANGE: |
1905 | case OP_CRPOSRANGE: |
1906 | if (GET2(cc,1) != GET2(cc,1+IMM2_SIZE)) return -1; |
1907 | branchlength += (int)GET2(cc,1); |
1908 | cc += 1 + 2 * IMM2_SIZE; |
1909 | break; |
1910 | |
1911 | default: |
1912 | branchlength++; |
1913 | } |
1914 | break; |
1915 | |
1916 | /* Anything else is variable length */ |
1917 | |
1918 | case OP_ANYNL: |
1919 | case OP_BRAMINZERO: |
1920 | case OP_BRAPOS: |
1921 | case OP_BRAPOSZERO: |
1922 | case OP_BRAZERO: |
1923 | case OP_CBRAPOS: |
1924 | case OP_EXTUNI: |
1925 | case OP_KETRMAX: |
1926 | case OP_KETRMIN: |
1927 | case OP_KETRPOS: |
1928 | case OP_MINPLUS: |
1929 | case OP_MINPLUSI: |
1930 | case OP_MINQUERY: |
1931 | case OP_MINQUERYI: |
1932 | case OP_MINSTAR: |
1933 | case OP_MINSTARI: |
1934 | case OP_MINUPTO: |
1935 | case OP_MINUPTOI: |
1936 | case OP_NOTMINPLUS: |
1937 | case OP_NOTMINPLUSI: |
1938 | case OP_NOTMINQUERY: |
1939 | case OP_NOTMINQUERYI: |
1940 | case OP_NOTMINSTAR: |
1941 | case OP_NOTMINSTARI: |
1942 | case OP_NOTMINUPTO: |
1943 | case OP_NOTMINUPTOI: |
1944 | case OP_NOTPLUS: |
1945 | case OP_NOTPLUSI: |
1946 | case OP_NOTPOSPLUS: |
1947 | case OP_NOTPOSPLUSI: |
1948 | case OP_NOTPOSQUERY: |
1949 | case OP_NOTPOSQUERYI: |
1950 | case OP_NOTPOSSTAR: |
1951 | case OP_NOTPOSSTARI: |
1952 | case OP_NOTPOSUPTO: |
1953 | case OP_NOTPOSUPTOI: |
1954 | case OP_NOTQUERY: |
1955 | case OP_NOTQUERYI: |
1956 | case OP_NOTSTAR: |
1957 | case OP_NOTSTARI: |
1958 | case OP_NOTUPTO: |
1959 | case OP_NOTUPTOI: |
1960 | case OP_PLUS: |
1961 | case OP_PLUSI: |
1962 | case OP_POSPLUS: |
1963 | case OP_POSPLUSI: |
1964 | case OP_POSQUERY: |
1965 | case OP_POSQUERYI: |
1966 | case OP_POSSTAR: |
1967 | case OP_POSSTARI: |
1968 | case OP_POSUPTO: |
1969 | case OP_POSUPTOI: |
1970 | case OP_QUERY: |
1971 | case OP_QUERYI: |
1972 | case OP_REF: |
1973 | case OP_REFI: |
1974 | case OP_DNREF: |
1975 | case OP_DNREFI: |
1976 | case OP_SBRA: |
1977 | case OP_SBRAPOS: |
1978 | case OP_SCBRA: |
1979 | case OP_SCBRAPOS: |
1980 | case OP_SCOND: |
1981 | case OP_SKIPZERO: |
1982 | case OP_STAR: |
1983 | case OP_STARI: |
1984 | case OP_TYPEMINPLUS: |
1985 | case OP_TYPEMINQUERY: |
1986 | case OP_TYPEMINSTAR: |
1987 | case OP_TYPEMINUPTO: |
1988 | case OP_TYPEPLUS: |
1989 | case OP_TYPEPOSPLUS: |
1990 | case OP_TYPEPOSQUERY: |
1991 | case OP_TYPEPOSSTAR: |
1992 | case OP_TYPEPOSUPTO: |
1993 | case OP_TYPEQUERY: |
1994 | case OP_TYPESTAR: |
1995 | case OP_TYPEUPTO: |
1996 | case OP_UPTO: |
1997 | case OP_UPTOI: |
1998 | return -1; |
1999 | |
2000 | /* Catch unrecognized opcodes so that when new ones are added they |
2001 | are not forgotten, as has happened in the past. */ |
2002 | |
2003 | default: |
2004 | return -4; |
2005 | } |
2006 | } |
2007 | /* Control never gets here */ |
2008 | } |
2009 | |
2010 | |
2011 | |
2012 | /************************************************* |
2013 | * Scan compiled regex for specific bracket * |
2014 | *************************************************/ |
2015 | |
2016 | /* This little function scans through a compiled pattern until it finds a |
2017 | capturing bracket with the given number, or, if the number is negative, an |
2018 | instance of OP_REVERSE for a lookbehind. The function is global in the C sense |
2019 | so that it can be called from pcre_study() when finding the minimum matching |
2020 | length. |
2021 | |
2022 | Arguments: |
2023 | code points to start of expression |
2024 | utf TRUE in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
2025 | number the required bracket number or negative to find a lookbehind |
2026 | |
2027 | Returns: pointer to the opcode for the bracket, or NULL if not found |
2028 | */ |
2029 | |
2030 | const pcre_uchar * |
2031 | PRIV(find_bracket)(const pcre_uchar *code, BOOL utf, int number) |
2032 | { |
2033 | for (;;) |
2034 | { |
2035 | register pcre_uchar c = *code; |
2036 | |
2037 | if (c == OP_END) return NULL; |
2038 | |
2039 | /* XCLASS is used for classes that cannot be represented just by a bit |
2040 | map. This includes negated single high-valued characters. The length in |
2041 | the table is zero; the actual length is stored in the compiled code. */ |
2042 | |
2043 | if (c == OP_XCLASS) code += GET(code, 1); |
2044 | |
2045 | /* Handle recursion */ |
2046 | |
2047 | else if (c == OP_REVERSE) |
2048 | { |
2049 | if (number < 0) return (pcre_uchar *)code; |
2050 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
2051 | } |
2052 | |
2053 | /* Handle capturing bracket */ |
2054 | |
2055 | else if (c == OP_CBRA || c == OP_SCBRA || |
2056 | c == OP_CBRAPOS || c == OP_SCBRAPOS) |
2057 | { |
2058 | int n = (int)GET2(code, 1+LINK_SIZE); |
2059 | if (n == number) return (pcre_uchar *)code; |
2060 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
2061 | } |
2062 | |
2063 | /* Otherwise, we can get the item's length from the table, except that for |
2064 | repeated character types, we have to test for \p and \P, which have an extra |
2065 | two bytes of parameters, and for MARK/PRUNE/SKIP/THEN with an argument, we |
2066 | must add in its length. */ |
2067 | |
2068 | else |
2069 | { |
2070 | switch(c) |
2071 | { |
2072 | case OP_TYPESTAR: |
2073 | case OP_TYPEMINSTAR: |
2074 | case OP_TYPEPLUS: |
2075 | case OP_TYPEMINPLUS: |
2076 | case OP_TYPEQUERY: |
2077 | case OP_TYPEMINQUERY: |
2078 | case OP_TYPEPOSSTAR: |
2079 | case OP_TYPEPOSPLUS: |
2080 | case OP_TYPEPOSQUERY: |
2081 | if (code[1] == OP_PROP || code[1] == OP_NOTPROP) code += 2; |
2082 | break; |
2083 | |
2084 | case OP_TYPEUPTO: |
2085 | case OP_TYPEMINUPTO: |
2086 | case OP_TYPEEXACT: |
2087 | case OP_TYPEPOSUPTO: |
2088 | if (code[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_PROP || code[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_NOTPROP) |
2089 | code += 2; |
2090 | break; |
2091 | |
2092 | case OP_MARK: |
2093 | case OP_PRUNE_ARG: |
2094 | case OP_SKIP_ARG: |
2095 | case OP_THEN_ARG: |
2096 | code += code[1]; |
2097 | break; |
2098 | } |
2099 | |
2100 | /* Add in the fixed length from the table */ |
2101 | |
2102 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
2103 | |
2104 | /* In UTF-8 mode, opcodes that are followed by a character may be followed by |
2105 | a multi-byte character. The length in the table is a minimum, so we have to |
2106 | arrange to skip the extra bytes. */ |
2107 | |
2108 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
2109 | if (utf) switch(c) |
2110 | { |
2111 | case OP_CHAR: |
2112 | case OP_CHARI: |
2113 | case OP_EXACT: |
2114 | case OP_EXACTI: |
2115 | case OP_UPTO: |
2116 | case OP_UPTOI: |
2117 | case OP_MINUPTO: |
2118 | case OP_MINUPTOI: |
2119 | case OP_POSUPTO: |
2120 | case OP_POSUPTOI: |
2121 | case OP_STAR: |
2122 | case OP_STARI: |
2123 | case OP_MINSTAR: |
2124 | case OP_MINSTARI: |
2125 | case OP_POSSTAR: |
2126 | case OP_POSSTARI: |
2127 | case OP_PLUS: |
2128 | case OP_PLUSI: |
2129 | case OP_MINPLUS: |
2130 | case OP_MINPLUSI: |
2131 | case OP_POSPLUS: |
2132 | case OP_POSPLUSI: |
2133 | case OP_QUERY: |
2134 | case OP_QUERYI: |
2135 | case OP_MINQUERY: |
2136 | case OP_MINQUERYI: |
2137 | case OP_POSQUERY: |
2138 | case OP_POSQUERYI: |
2139 | if (HAS_EXTRALEN(code[-1])) code += GET_EXTRALEN(code[-1]); |
2140 | break; |
2141 | } |
2142 | #else |
2143 | (void)(utf); /* Keep compiler happy by referencing function argument */ |
2144 | #endif |
2145 | } |
2146 | } |
2147 | } |
2148 | |
2149 | |
2150 | |
2151 | /************************************************* |
2152 | * Scan compiled regex for recursion reference * |
2153 | *************************************************/ |
2154 | |
2155 | /* This little function scans through a compiled pattern until it finds an |
2156 | instance of OP_RECURSE. |
2157 | |
2158 | Arguments: |
2159 | code points to start of expression |
2160 | utf TRUE in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
2161 | |
2162 | Returns: pointer to the opcode for OP_RECURSE, or NULL if not found |
2163 | */ |
2164 | |
2165 | static const pcre_uchar * |
2166 | find_recurse(const pcre_uchar *code, BOOL utf) |
2167 | { |
2168 | for (;;) |
2169 | { |
2170 | register pcre_uchar c = *code; |
2171 | if (c == OP_END) return NULL; |
2172 | if (c == OP_RECURSE) return code; |
2173 | |
2174 | /* XCLASS is used for classes that cannot be represented just by a bit |
2175 | map. This includes negated single high-valued characters. The length in |
2176 | the table is zero; the actual length is stored in the compiled code. */ |
2177 | |
2178 | if (c == OP_XCLASS) code += GET(code, 1); |
2179 | |
2180 | /* Otherwise, we can get the item's length from the table, except that for |
2181 | repeated character types, we have to test for \p and \P, which have an extra |
2182 | two bytes of parameters, and for MARK/PRUNE/SKIP/THEN with an argument, we |
2183 | must add in its length. */ |
2184 | |
2185 | else |
2186 | { |
2187 | switch(c) |
2188 | { |
2189 | case OP_TYPESTAR: |
2190 | case OP_TYPEMINSTAR: |
2191 | case OP_TYPEPLUS: |
2192 | case OP_TYPEMINPLUS: |
2193 | case OP_TYPEQUERY: |
2194 | case OP_TYPEMINQUERY: |
2195 | case OP_TYPEPOSSTAR: |
2196 | case OP_TYPEPOSPLUS: |
2197 | case OP_TYPEPOSQUERY: |
2198 | if (code[1] == OP_PROP || code[1] == OP_NOTPROP) code += 2; |
2199 | break; |
2200 | |
2201 | case OP_TYPEPOSUPTO: |
2202 | case OP_TYPEUPTO: |
2203 | case OP_TYPEMINUPTO: |
2204 | case OP_TYPEEXACT: |
2205 | if (code[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_PROP || code[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_NOTPROP) |
2206 | code += 2; |
2207 | break; |
2208 | |
2209 | case OP_MARK: |
2210 | case OP_PRUNE_ARG: |
2211 | case OP_SKIP_ARG: |
2212 | case OP_THEN_ARG: |
2213 | code += code[1]; |
2214 | break; |
2215 | } |
2216 | |
2217 | /* Add in the fixed length from the table */ |
2218 | |
2219 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
2220 | |
2221 | /* In UTF-8 mode, opcodes that are followed by a character may be followed |
2222 | by a multi-byte character. The length in the table is a minimum, so we have |
2223 | to arrange to skip the extra bytes. */ |
2224 | |
2225 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
2226 | if (utf) switch(c) |
2227 | { |
2228 | case OP_CHAR: |
2229 | case OP_CHARI: |
2230 | case OP_NOT: |
2231 | case OP_NOTI: |
2232 | case OP_EXACT: |
2233 | case OP_EXACTI: |
2234 | case OP_NOTEXACT: |
2235 | case OP_NOTEXACTI: |
2236 | case OP_UPTO: |
2237 | case OP_UPTOI: |
2238 | case OP_NOTUPTO: |
2239 | case OP_NOTUPTOI: |
2240 | case OP_MINUPTO: |
2241 | case OP_MINUPTOI: |
2242 | case OP_NOTMINUPTO: |
2243 | case OP_NOTMINUPTOI: |
2244 | case OP_POSUPTO: |
2245 | case OP_POSUPTOI: |
2246 | case OP_NOTPOSUPTO: |
2247 | case OP_NOTPOSUPTOI: |
2248 | case OP_STAR: |
2249 | case OP_STARI: |
2250 | case OP_NOTSTAR: |
2251 | case OP_NOTSTARI: |
2252 | case OP_MINSTAR: |
2253 | case OP_MINSTARI: |
2254 | case OP_NOTMINSTAR: |
2255 | case OP_NOTMINSTARI: |
2256 | case OP_POSSTAR: |
2257 | case OP_POSSTARI: |
2258 | case OP_NOTPOSSTAR: |
2259 | case OP_NOTPOSSTARI: |
2260 | case OP_PLUS: |
2261 | case OP_PLUSI: |
2262 | case OP_NOTPLUS: |
2263 | case OP_NOTPLUSI: |
2264 | case OP_MINPLUS: |
2265 | case OP_MINPLUSI: |
2266 | case OP_NOTMINPLUS: |
2267 | case OP_NOTMINPLUSI: |
2268 | case OP_POSPLUS: |
2269 | case OP_POSPLUSI: |
2270 | case OP_NOTPOSPLUS: |
2271 | case OP_NOTPOSPLUSI: |
2272 | case OP_QUERY: |
2273 | case OP_QUERYI: |
2274 | case OP_NOTQUERY: |
2275 | case OP_NOTQUERYI: |
2276 | case OP_MINQUERY: |
2277 | case OP_MINQUERYI: |
2278 | case OP_NOTMINQUERY: |
2279 | case OP_NOTMINQUERYI: |
2280 | case OP_POSQUERY: |
2281 | case OP_POSQUERYI: |
2282 | case OP_NOTPOSQUERY: |
2283 | case OP_NOTPOSQUERYI: |
2284 | if (HAS_EXTRALEN(code[-1])) code += GET_EXTRALEN(code[-1]); |
2285 | break; |
2286 | } |
2287 | #else |
2288 | (void)(utf); /* Keep compiler happy by referencing function argument */ |
2289 | #endif |
2290 | } |
2291 | } |
2292 | } |
2293 | |
2294 | |
2295 | |
2296 | /************************************************* |
2297 | * Scan compiled branch for non-emptiness * |
2298 | *************************************************/ |
2299 | |
2300 | /* This function scans through a branch of a compiled pattern to see whether it |
2301 | can match the empty string or not. It is called from could_be_empty() |
2302 | below and from compile_branch() when checking for an unlimited repeat of a |
2303 | group that can match nothing. Note that first_significant_code() skips over |
2304 | backward and negative forward assertions when its final argument is TRUE. If we |
2305 | hit an unclosed bracket, we return "empty" - this means we've struck an inner |
2306 | bracket whose current branch will already have been scanned. |
2307 | |
2308 | Arguments: |
2309 | code points to start of search |
2310 | endcode points to where to stop |
2311 | utf TRUE if in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
2312 | cd contains pointers to tables etc. |
2313 | recurses chain of recurse_check to catch mutual recursion |
2314 | |
2315 | Returns: TRUE if what is matched could be empty |
2316 | */ |
2317 | |
2318 | typedef struct recurse_check { |
2319 | struct recurse_check *prev; |
2320 | const pcre_uchar *group; |
2321 | } recurse_check; |
2322 | |
2323 | static BOOL |
2324 | could_be_empty_branch(const pcre_uchar *code, const pcre_uchar *endcode, |
2325 | BOOL utf, compile_data *cd, recurse_check *recurses) |
2326 | { |
2327 | register pcre_uchar c; |
2328 | recurse_check this_recurse; |
2329 | |
2330 | for (code = first_significant_code(code + PRIV(OP_lengths)[*code], TRUE); |
2331 | code < endcode; |
2332 | code = first_significant_code(code + PRIV(OP_lengths)[c], TRUE)) |
2333 | { |
2334 | const pcre_uchar *ccode; |
2335 | |
2336 | c = *code; |
2337 | |
2338 | /* Skip over forward assertions; the other assertions are skipped by |
2339 | first_significant_code() with a TRUE final argument. */ |
2340 | |
2341 | if (c == OP_ASSERT) |
2342 | { |
2343 | do code += GET(code, 1); while (*code == OP_ALT); |
2344 | c = *code; |
2345 | continue; |
2346 | } |
2347 | |
2348 | /* For a recursion/subroutine call, if its end has been reached, which |
2349 | implies a backward reference subroutine call, we can scan it. If it's a |
2350 | forward reference subroutine call, we can't. To detect forward reference |
2351 | we have to scan up the list that is kept in the workspace. This function is |
2352 | called only when doing the real compile, not during the pre-compile that |
2353 | measures the size of the compiled pattern. */ |
2354 | |
2355 | if (c == OP_RECURSE) |
2356 | { |
2357 | const pcre_uchar *scode = cd->start_code + GET(code, 1); |
2358 | BOOL empty_branch; |
2359 | |
2360 | /* Test for forward reference or uncompleted reference. This is disabled |
2361 | when called to scan a completed pattern by setting cd->start_workspace to |
2362 | NULL. */ |
2363 | |
2364 | if (cd->start_workspace != NULL) |
2365 | { |
2366 | const pcre_uchar *tcode; |
2367 | for (tcode = cd->start_workspace; tcode < cd->hwm; tcode += LINK_SIZE) |
2368 | if ((int)GET(tcode, 0) == (int)(code + 1 - cd->start_code)) return TRUE; |
2369 | if (GET(scode, 1) == 0) return TRUE; /* Unclosed */ |
2370 | } |
2371 | |
2372 | /* If we are scanning a completed pattern, there are no forward references |
2373 | and all groups are complete. We need to detect whether this is a recursive |
2374 | call, as otherwise there will be an infinite loop. If it is a recursion, |
2375 | just skip over it. Simple recursions are easily detected. For mutual |
2376 | recursions we keep a chain on the stack. */ |
2377 | |
2378 | else |
2379 | { |
2380 | recurse_check *r = recurses; |
2381 | const pcre_uchar *endgroup = scode; |
2382 | |
2383 | do endgroup += GET(endgroup, 1); while (*endgroup == OP_ALT); |
2384 | if (code >= scode && code <= endgroup) continue; /* Simple recursion */ |
2385 | |
2386 | for (r = recurses; r != NULL; r = r->prev) |
2387 | if (r->group == scode) break; |
2388 | if (r != NULL) continue; /* Mutual recursion */ |
2389 | } |
2390 | |
2391 | /* Completed reference; scan the referenced group, remembering it on the |
2392 | stack chain to detect mutual recursions. */ |
2393 | |
2394 | empty_branch = FALSE; |
2395 | this_recurse.prev = recurses; |
2396 | this_recurse.group = scode; |
2397 | |
2398 | do |
2399 | { |
2400 | if (could_be_empty_branch(scode, endcode, utf, cd, &this_recurse)) |
2401 | { |
2402 | empty_branch = TRUE; |
2403 | break; |
2404 | } |
2405 | scode += GET(scode, 1); |
2406 | } |
2407 | while (*scode == OP_ALT); |
2408 | |
2409 | if (!empty_branch) return FALSE; /* All branches are non-empty */ |
2410 | continue; |
2411 | } |
2412 | |
2413 | /* Groups with zero repeats can of course be empty; skip them. */ |
2414 | |
2415 | if (c == OP_BRAZERO || c == OP_BRAMINZERO || c == OP_SKIPZERO || |
2416 | c == OP_BRAPOSZERO) |
2417 | { |
2418 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
2419 | do code += GET(code, 1); while (*code == OP_ALT); |
2420 | c = *code; |
2421 | continue; |
2422 | } |
2423 | |
2424 | /* A nested group that is already marked as "could be empty" can just be |
2425 | skipped. */ |
2426 | |
2427 | if (c == OP_SBRA || c == OP_SBRAPOS || |
2428 | c == OP_SCBRA || c == OP_SCBRAPOS) |
2429 | { |
2430 | do code += GET(code, 1); while (*code == OP_ALT); |
2431 | c = *code; |
2432 | continue; |
2433 | } |
2434 | |
2435 | /* For other groups, scan the branches. */ |
2436 | |
2437 | if (c == OP_BRA || c == OP_BRAPOS || |
2438 | c == OP_CBRA || c == OP_CBRAPOS || |
2439 | c == OP_ONCE || c == OP_ONCE_NC || |
2440 | c == OP_COND) |
2441 | { |
2442 | BOOL empty_branch; |
2443 | if (GET(code, 1) == 0) return TRUE; /* Hit unclosed bracket */ |
2444 | |
2445 | /* If a conditional group has only one branch, there is a second, implied, |
2446 | empty branch, so just skip over the conditional, because it could be empty. |
2447 | Otherwise, scan the individual branches of the group. */ |
2448 | |
2449 | if (c == OP_COND && code[GET(code, 1)] != OP_ALT) |
2450 | code += GET(code, 1); |
2451 | else |
2452 | { |
2453 | empty_branch = FALSE; |
2454 | do |
2455 | { |
2456 | if (!empty_branch && could_be_empty_branch(code, endcode, utf, cd, NULL)) |
2457 | empty_branch = TRUE; |
2458 | code += GET(code, 1); |
2459 | } |
2460 | while (*code == OP_ALT); |
2461 | if (!empty_branch) return FALSE; /* All branches are non-empty */ |
2462 | } |
2463 | |
2464 | c = *code; |
2465 | continue; |
2466 | } |
2467 | |
2468 | /* Handle the other opcodes */ |
2469 | |
2470 | switch (c) |
2471 | { |
2472 | /* Check for quantifiers after a class. XCLASS is used for classes that |
2473 | cannot be represented just by a bit map. This includes negated single |
2474 | high-valued characters. The length in PRIV(OP_lengths)[] is zero; the |
2475 | actual length is stored in the compiled code, so we must update "code" |
2476 | here. */ |
2477 | |
2478 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
2479 | case OP_XCLASS: |
2480 | ccode = code += GET(code, 1); |
2481 | goto CHECK_CLASS_REPEAT; |
2482 | #endif |
2483 | |
2484 | case OP_CLASS: |
2485 | case OP_NCLASS: |
2486 | ccode = code + PRIV(OP_lengths)[OP_CLASS]; |
2487 | |
2488 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
2489 | CHECK_CLASS_REPEAT: |
2490 | #endif |
2491 | |
2492 | switch (*ccode) |
2493 | { |
2494 | case OP_CRSTAR: /* These could be empty; continue */ |
2495 | case OP_CRMINSTAR: |
2496 | case OP_CRQUERY: |
2497 | case OP_CRMINQUERY: |
2498 | case OP_CRPOSSTAR: |
2499 | case OP_CRPOSQUERY: |
2500 | break; |
2501 | |
2502 | default: /* Non-repeat => class must match */ |
2503 | case OP_CRPLUS: /* These repeats aren't empty */ |
2504 | case OP_CRMINPLUS: |
2505 | case OP_CRPOSPLUS: |
2506 | return FALSE; |
2507 | |
2508 | case OP_CRRANGE: |
2509 | case OP_CRMINRANGE: |
2510 | case OP_CRPOSRANGE: |
2511 | if (GET2(ccode, 1) > 0) return FALSE; /* Minimum > 0 */ |
2512 | break; |
2513 | } |
2514 | break; |
2515 | |
2516 | /* Opcodes that must match a character */ |
2517 | |
2518 | case OP_ANY: |
2519 | case OP_ALLANY: |
2520 | case OP_ANYBYTE: |
2521 | |
2522 | case OP_PROP: |
2523 | case OP_NOTPROP: |
2524 | case OP_ANYNL: |
2525 | |
2526 | case OP_NOT_HSPACE: |
2527 | case OP_HSPACE: |
2528 | case OP_NOT_VSPACE: |
2529 | case OP_VSPACE: |
2530 | case OP_EXTUNI: |
2531 | |
2532 | case OP_NOT_DIGIT: |
2533 | case OP_DIGIT: |
2534 | case OP_NOT_WHITESPACE: |
2535 | case OP_WHITESPACE: |
2536 | case OP_NOT_WORDCHAR: |
2537 | case OP_WORDCHAR: |
2538 | |
2539 | case OP_CHAR: |
2540 | case OP_CHARI: |
2541 | case OP_NOT: |
2542 | case OP_NOTI: |
2543 | |
2544 | case OP_PLUS: |
2545 | case OP_PLUSI: |
2546 | case OP_MINPLUS: |
2547 | case OP_MINPLUSI: |
2548 | |
2549 | case OP_NOTPLUS: |
2550 | case OP_NOTPLUSI: |
2551 | case OP_NOTMINPLUS: |
2552 | case OP_NOTMINPLUSI: |
2553 | |
2554 | case OP_POSPLUS: |
2555 | case OP_POSPLUSI: |
2556 | case OP_NOTPOSPLUS: |
2557 | case OP_NOTPOSPLUSI: |
2558 | |
2559 | case OP_EXACT: |
2560 | case OP_EXACTI: |
2561 | case OP_NOTEXACT: |
2562 | case OP_NOTEXACTI: |
2563 | |
2564 | case OP_TYPEPLUS: |
2565 | case OP_TYPEMINPLUS: |
2566 | case OP_TYPEPOSPLUS: |
2567 | case OP_TYPEEXACT: |
2568 | |
2569 | return FALSE; |
2570 | |
2571 | /* These are going to continue, as they may be empty, but we have to |
2572 | fudge the length for the \p and \P cases. */ |
2573 | |
2574 | case OP_TYPESTAR: |
2575 | case OP_TYPEMINSTAR: |
2576 | case OP_TYPEPOSSTAR: |
2577 | case OP_TYPEQUERY: |
2578 | case OP_TYPEMINQUERY: |
2579 | case OP_TYPEPOSQUERY: |
2580 | if (code[1] == OP_PROP || code[1] == OP_NOTPROP) code += 2; |
2581 | break; |
2582 | |
2583 | /* Same for these */ |
2584 | |
2585 | case OP_TYPEUPTO: |
2586 | case OP_TYPEMINUPTO: |
2587 | case OP_TYPEPOSUPTO: |
2588 | if (code[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_PROP || code[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_NOTPROP) |
2589 | code += 2; |
2590 | break; |
2591 | |
2592 | /* End of branch */ |
2593 | |
2594 | case OP_KET: |
2595 | case OP_KETRMAX: |
2596 | case OP_KETRMIN: |
2597 | case OP_KETRPOS: |
2598 | case OP_ALT: |
2599 | return TRUE; |
2600 | |
2601 | /* In UTF-8 mode, STAR, MINSTAR, POSSTAR, QUERY, MINQUERY, POSQUERY, UPTO, |
2602 | MINUPTO, and POSUPTO and their caseless and negative versions may be |
2603 | followed by a multibyte character. */ |
2604 | |
2605 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
2606 | case OP_STAR: |
2607 | case OP_STARI: |
2608 | case OP_NOTSTAR: |
2609 | case OP_NOTSTARI: |
2610 | |
2611 | case OP_MINSTAR: |
2612 | case OP_MINSTARI: |
2613 | case OP_NOTMINSTAR: |
2614 | case OP_NOTMINSTARI: |
2615 | |
2616 | case OP_POSSTAR: |
2617 | case OP_POSSTARI: |
2618 | case OP_NOTPOSSTAR: |
2619 | case OP_NOTPOSSTARI: |
2620 | |
2621 | case OP_QUERY: |
2622 | case OP_QUERYI: |
2623 | case OP_NOTQUERY: |
2624 | case OP_NOTQUERYI: |
2625 | |
2626 | case OP_MINQUERY: |
2627 | case OP_MINQUERYI: |
2628 | case OP_NOTMINQUERY: |
2629 | case OP_NOTMINQUERYI: |
2630 | |
2631 | case OP_POSQUERY: |
2632 | case OP_POSQUERYI: |
2633 | case OP_NOTPOSQUERY: |
2634 | case OP_NOTPOSQUERYI: |
2635 | |
2636 | if (utf && HAS_EXTRALEN(code[1])) code += GET_EXTRALEN(code[1]); |
2637 | break; |
2638 | |
2639 | case OP_UPTO: |
2640 | case OP_UPTOI: |
2641 | case OP_NOTUPTO: |
2642 | case OP_NOTUPTOI: |
2643 | |
2644 | case OP_MINUPTO: |
2645 | case OP_MINUPTOI: |
2646 | case OP_NOTMINUPTO: |
2647 | case OP_NOTMINUPTOI: |
2648 | |
2649 | case OP_POSUPTO: |
2650 | case OP_POSUPTOI: |
2651 | case OP_NOTPOSUPTO: |
2652 | case OP_NOTPOSUPTOI: |
2653 | |
2654 | if (utf && HAS_EXTRALEN(code[1 + IMM2_SIZE])) code += GET_EXTRALEN(code[1 + IMM2_SIZE]); |
2655 | break; |
2656 | #endif |
2657 | |
2658 | /* MARK, and PRUNE/SKIP/THEN with an argument must skip over the argument |
2659 | string. */ |
2660 | |
2661 | case OP_MARK: |
2662 | case OP_PRUNE_ARG: |
2663 | case OP_SKIP_ARG: |
2664 | case OP_THEN_ARG: |
2665 | code += code[1]; |
2666 | break; |
2667 | |
2668 | /* None of the remaining opcodes are required to match a character. */ |
2669 | |
2670 | default: |
2671 | break; |
2672 | } |
2673 | } |
2674 | |
2675 | return TRUE; |
2676 | } |
2677 | |
2678 | |
2679 | |
2680 | /************************************************* |
2681 | * Scan compiled regex for non-emptiness * |
2682 | *************************************************/ |
2683 | |
2684 | /* This function is called to check for left recursive calls. We want to check |
2685 | the current branch of the current pattern to see if it could match the empty |
2686 | string. If it could, we must look outwards for branches at other levels, |
2687 | stopping when we pass beyond the bracket which is the subject of the recursion. |
2688 | This function is called only during the real compile, not during the |
2689 | pre-compile. |
2690 | |
2691 | Arguments: |
2692 | code points to start of the recursion |
2693 | endcode points to where to stop (current RECURSE item) |
2694 | bcptr points to the chain of current (unclosed) branch starts |
2695 | utf TRUE if in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
2696 | cd pointers to tables etc |
2697 | |
2698 | Returns: TRUE if what is matched could be empty |
2699 | */ |
2700 | |
2701 | static BOOL |
2702 | could_be_empty(const pcre_uchar *code, const pcre_uchar *endcode, |
2703 | branch_chain *bcptr, BOOL utf, compile_data *cd) |
2704 | { |
2705 | while (bcptr != NULL && bcptr->current_branch >= code) |
2706 | { |
2707 | if (!could_be_empty_branch(bcptr->current_branch, endcode, utf, cd, NULL)) |
2708 | return FALSE; |
2709 | bcptr = bcptr->outer; |
2710 | } |
2711 | return TRUE; |
2712 | } |
2713 | |
2714 | |
2715 | |
2716 | /************************************************* |
2717 | * Base opcode of repeated opcodes * |
2718 | *************************************************/ |
2719 | |
2720 | /* Returns the base opcode for repeated single character type opcodes. If the |
2721 | opcode is not a repeated character type, it returns with the original value. |
2722 | |
2723 | Arguments: c opcode |
2724 | Returns: base opcode for the type |
2725 | */ |
2726 | |
2727 | static pcre_uchar |
2728 | get_repeat_base(pcre_uchar c) |
2729 | { |
2730 | return (c > OP_TYPEPOSUPTO)? c : |
2731 | (c >= OP_TYPESTAR)? OP_TYPESTAR : |
2732 | (c >= OP_NOTSTARI)? OP_NOTSTARI : |
2733 | (c >= OP_NOTSTAR)? OP_NOTSTAR : |
2734 | (c >= OP_STARI)? OP_STARI : |
2735 | OP_STAR; |
2736 | } |
2737 | |
2738 | |
2739 | |
2740 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
2741 | /************************************************* |
2742 | * Check a character and a property * |
2743 | *************************************************/ |
2744 | |
2745 | /* This function is called by check_auto_possessive() when a property item |
2746 | is adjacent to a fixed character. |
2747 | |
2748 | Arguments: |
2749 | c the character |
2750 | ptype the property type |
2751 | pdata the data for the type |
2752 | negated TRUE if it's a negated property (\P or \p{^) |
2753 | |
2754 | Returns: TRUE if auto-possessifying is OK |
2755 | */ |
2756 | |
2757 | static BOOL |
2758 | check_char_prop(pcre_uint32 c, unsigned int ptype, unsigned int pdata, |
2759 | BOOL negated) |
2760 | { |
2761 | const pcre_uint32 *p; |
2762 | const ucd_record *prop = GET_UCD(c); |
2763 | |
2764 | switch(ptype) |
2765 | { |
2766 | case PT_LAMP: |
2767 | return (prop->chartype == ucp_Lu || |
2768 | prop->chartype == ucp_Ll || |
2769 | prop->chartype == ucp_Lt) == negated; |
2770 | |
2771 | case PT_GC: |
2772 | return (pdata == PRIV(ucp_gentype)[prop->chartype]) == negated; |
2773 | |
2774 | case PT_PC: |
2775 | return (pdata == prop->chartype) == negated; |
2776 | |
2777 | case PT_SC: |
2778 | return (pdata == prop->script) == negated; |
2779 | |
2780 | /* These are specials */ |
2781 | |
2782 | case PT_ALNUM: |
2783 | return (PRIV(ucp_gentype)[prop->chartype] == ucp_L || |
2784 | PRIV(ucp_gentype)[prop->chartype] == ucp_N) == negated; |
2785 | |
2786 | /* Perl space used to exclude VT, but from Perl 5.18 it is included, which |
2787 | means that Perl space and POSIX space are now identical. PCRE was changed |
2788 | at release 8.34. */ |
2789 | |
2790 | case PT_SPACE: /* Perl space */ |
2791 | case PT_PXSPACE: /* POSIX space */ |
2792 | switch(c) |
2793 | { |
2794 | HSPACE_CASES: |
2795 | VSPACE_CASES: |
2796 | return negated; |
2797 | |
2798 | default: |
2799 | return (PRIV(ucp_gentype)[prop->chartype] == ucp_Z) == negated; |
2800 | } |
2801 | break; /* Control never reaches here */ |
2802 | |
2803 | case PT_WORD: |
2804 | return (PRIV(ucp_gentype)[prop->chartype] == ucp_L || |
2805 | PRIV(ucp_gentype)[prop->chartype] == ucp_N || |
2806 | c == CHAR_UNDERSCORE) == negated; |
2807 | |
2808 | case PT_CLIST: |
2809 | p = PRIV(ucd_caseless_sets) + prop->caseset; |
2810 | for (;;) |
2811 | { |
2812 | if (c < *p) return !negated; |
2813 | if (c == *p++) return negated; |
2814 | } |
2815 | break; /* Control never reaches here */ |
2816 | } |
2817 | |
2818 | return FALSE; |
2819 | } |
2820 | #endif /* SUPPORT_UCP */ |
2821 | |
2822 | |
2823 | |
2824 | /************************************************* |
2825 | * Fill the character property list * |
2826 | *************************************************/ |
2827 | |
2828 | /* Checks whether the code points to an opcode that can take part in auto- |
2829 | possessification, and if so, fills a list with its properties. |
2830 | |
2831 | Arguments: |
2832 | code points to start of expression |
2833 | utf TRUE if in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
2834 | fcc points to case-flipping table |
2835 | list points to output list |
2836 | list[0] will be filled with the opcode |
2837 | list[1] will be non-zero if this opcode |
2838 | can match an empty character string |
2839 | list[2..7] depends on the opcode |
2840 | |
2841 | Returns: points to the start of the next opcode if *code is accepted |
2842 | NULL if *code is not accepted |
2843 | */ |
2844 | |
2845 | static const pcre_uchar * |
2846 | get_chr_property_list(const pcre_uchar *code, BOOL utf, |
2847 | const pcre_uint8 *fcc, pcre_uint32 *list) |
2848 | { |
2849 | pcre_uchar c = *code; |
2850 | const pcre_uchar *end; |
2851 | const pcre_uint32 *clist_src; |
2852 | pcre_uint32 *clist_dest; |
2853 | pcre_uint32 chr; |
2854 | pcre_uchar base; |
2855 | |
2856 | list[0] = c; |
2857 | list[1] = FALSE; |
2858 | code++; |
2859 | |
2860 | if (c >= OP_STAR && c <= OP_TYPEPOSUPTO) |
2861 | { |
2862 | base = get_repeat_base(c); |
2863 | c -= (base - OP_STAR); |
2864 | |
2865 | if (c == OP_UPTO || c == OP_MINUPTO || c == OP_EXACT || c == OP_POSUPTO) |
2866 | code += IMM2_SIZE; |
2867 | |
2868 | list[1] = (c != OP_PLUS && c != OP_MINPLUS && c != OP_EXACT && c != OP_POSPLUS); |
2869 | |
2870 | switch(base) |
2871 | { |
2872 | case OP_STAR: |
2873 | list[0] = OP_CHAR; |
2874 | break; |
2875 | |
2876 | case OP_STARI: |
2877 | list[0] = OP_CHARI; |
2878 | break; |
2879 | |
2880 | case OP_NOTSTAR: |
2881 | list[0] = OP_NOT; |
2882 | break; |
2883 | |
2884 | case OP_NOTSTARI: |
2885 | list[0] = OP_NOTI; |
2886 | break; |
2887 | |
2888 | case OP_TYPESTAR: |
2889 | list[0] = *code; |
2890 | code++; |
2891 | break; |
2892 | } |
2893 | c = list[0]; |
2894 | } |
2895 | |
2896 | switch(c) |
2897 | { |
2898 | case OP_NOT_DIGIT: |
2899 | case OP_DIGIT: |
2900 | case OP_NOT_WHITESPACE: |
2901 | case OP_WHITESPACE: |
2902 | case OP_NOT_WORDCHAR: |
2903 | case OP_WORDCHAR: |
2904 | case OP_ANY: |
2905 | case OP_ALLANY: |
2906 | case OP_ANYNL: |
2907 | case OP_NOT_HSPACE: |
2908 | case OP_HSPACE: |
2909 | case OP_NOT_VSPACE: |
2910 | case OP_VSPACE: |
2911 | case OP_EXTUNI: |
2912 | case OP_EODN: |
2913 | case OP_EOD: |
2914 | case OP_DOLL: |
2915 | case OP_DOLLM: |
2916 | return code; |
2917 | |
2918 | case OP_CHAR: |
2919 | case OP_NOT: |
2920 | GETCHARINCTEST(chr, code); |
2921 | list[2] = chr; |
2922 | list[3] = NOTACHAR; |
2923 | return code; |
2924 | |
2925 | case OP_CHARI: |
2926 | case OP_NOTI: |
2927 | list[0] = (c == OP_CHARI) ? OP_CHAR : OP_NOT; |
2928 | GETCHARINCTEST(chr, code); |
2929 | list[2] = chr; |
2930 | |
2931 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
2932 | if (chr < 128 || (chr < 256 && !utf)) |
2933 | list[3] = fcc[chr]; |
2934 | else |
2935 | list[3] = UCD_OTHERCASE(chr); |
2936 | #elif defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
2937 | list[3] = (chr < 256) ? fcc[chr] : chr; |
2938 | #else |
2939 | list[3] = fcc[chr]; |
2940 | #endif |
2941 | |
2942 | /* The othercase might be the same value. */ |
2943 | |
2944 | if (chr == list[3]) |
2945 | list[3] = NOTACHAR; |
2946 | else |
2947 | list[4] = NOTACHAR; |
2948 | return code; |
2949 | |
2950 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
2951 | case OP_PROP: |
2952 | case OP_NOTPROP: |
2953 | if (code[0] != PT_CLIST) |
2954 | { |
2955 | list[2] = code[0]; |
2956 | list[3] = code[1]; |
2957 | return code + 2; |
2958 | } |
2959 | |
2960 | /* Convert only if we have enough space. */ |
2961 | |
2962 | clist_src = PRIV(ucd_caseless_sets) + code[1]; |
2963 | clist_dest = list + 2; |
2964 | code += 2; |
2965 | |
2966 | do { |
2967 | if (clist_dest >= list + 8) |
2968 | { |
2969 | /* Early return if there is not enough space. This should never |
2970 | happen, since all clists are shorter than 5 character now. */ |
2971 | list[2] = code[0]; |
2972 | list[3] = code[1]; |
2973 | return code; |
2974 | } |
2975 | *clist_dest++ = *clist_src; |
2976 | } |
2977 | while(*clist_src++ != NOTACHAR); |
2978 | |
2979 | /* All characters are stored. The terminating NOTACHAR |
2980 | is copied form the clist itself. */ |
2981 | |
2982 | list[0] = (c == OP_PROP) ? OP_CHAR : OP_NOT; |
2983 | return code; |
2984 | #endif |
2985 | |
2986 | case OP_NCLASS: |
2987 | case OP_CLASS: |
2988 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
2989 | case OP_XCLASS: |
2990 | if (c == OP_XCLASS) |
2991 | end = code + GET(code, 0) - 1; |
2992 | else |
2993 | #endif |
2994 | end = code + 32 / sizeof(pcre_uchar); |
2995 | |
2996 | switch(*end) |
2997 | { |
2998 | case OP_CRSTAR: |
2999 | case OP_CRMINSTAR: |
3000 | case OP_CRQUERY: |
3001 | case OP_CRMINQUERY: |
3002 | case OP_CRPOSSTAR: |
3003 | case OP_CRPOSQUERY: |
3004 | list[1] = TRUE; |
3005 | end++; |
3006 | break; |
3007 | |
3008 | case OP_CRPLUS: |
3009 | case OP_CRMINPLUS: |
3010 | case OP_CRPOSPLUS: |
3011 | end++; |
3012 | break; |
3013 | |
3014 | case OP_CRRANGE: |
3015 | case OP_CRMINRANGE: |
3016 | case OP_CRPOSRANGE: |
3017 | list[1] = (GET2(end, 1) == 0); |
3018 | end += 1 + 2 * IMM2_SIZE; |
3019 | break; |
3020 | } |
3021 | list[2] = end - code; |
3022 | return end; |
3023 | } |
3024 | return NULL; /* Opcode not accepted */ |
3025 | } |
3026 | |
3027 | |
3028 | |
3029 | /************************************************* |
3030 | * Scan further character sets for match * |
3031 | *************************************************/ |
3032 | |
3033 | /* Checks whether the base and the current opcode have a common character, in |
3034 | which case the base cannot be possessified. |
3035 | |
3036 | Arguments: |
3037 | code points to the byte code |
3038 | utf TRUE in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
3039 | cd static compile data |
3040 | base_list the data list of the base opcode |
3041 | |
3042 | Returns: TRUE if the auto-possessification is possible |
3043 | */ |
3044 | |
3045 | static BOOL |
3046 | compare_opcodes(const pcre_uchar *code, BOOL utf, const compile_data *cd, |
3047 | const pcre_uint32 *base_list, const pcre_uchar *base_end) |
3048 | { |
3049 | pcre_uchar c; |
3050 | pcre_uint32 list[8]; |
3051 | const pcre_uint32 *chr_ptr; |
3052 | const pcre_uint32 *ochr_ptr; |
3053 | const pcre_uint32 *list_ptr; |
3054 | const pcre_uchar *next_code; |
3055 | const pcre_uint8 *class_bitset; |
3056 | const pcre_uint32 *set1, *set2, *set_end; |
3057 | pcre_uint32 chr; |
3058 | BOOL accepted, invert_bits; |
3059 | |
3060 | /* Note: the base_list[1] contains whether the current opcode has greedy |
3061 | (represented by a non-zero value) quantifier. This is a different from |
3062 | other character type lists, which stores here that the character iterator |
3063 | matches to an empty string (also represented by a non-zero value). */ |
3064 | |
3065 | for(;;) |
3066 | { |
3067 | /* All operations move the code pointer forward. |
3068 | Therefore infinite recursions are not possible. */ |
3069 | |
3070 | c = *code; |
3071 | |
3072 | /* Skip over callouts */ |
3073 | |
3074 | if (c == OP_CALLOUT) |
3075 | { |
3076 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
3077 | continue; |
3078 | } |
3079 | |
3080 | if (c == OP_ALT) |
3081 | { |
3082 | do code += GET(code, 1); while (*code == OP_ALT); |
3083 | c = *code; |
3084 | } |
3085 | |
3086 | switch(c) |
3087 | { |
3088 | case OP_END: |
3089 | case OP_KETRPOS: |
3090 | /* TRUE only in greedy case. The non-greedy case could be replaced by |
3091 | an OP_EXACT, but it is probably not worth it. (And note that OP_EXACT |
3092 | uses more memory, which we cannot get at this stage.) */ |
3093 | |
3094 | return base_list[1] != 0; |
3095 | |
3096 | case OP_KET: |
3097 | /* If the bracket is capturing, and referenced by an OP_RECURSE, or |
3098 | it is an atomic sub-pattern (assert, once, etc.) the non-greedy case |
3099 | cannot be converted to a possessive form. */ |
3100 | |
3101 | if (base_list[1] == 0) return FALSE; |
3102 | |
3103 | switch(*(code - GET(code, 1))) |
3104 | { |
3105 | case OP_ASSERT: |
3106 | case OP_ASSERT_NOT: |
3107 | case OP_ASSERTBACK: |
3108 | case OP_ASSERTBACK_NOT: |
3109 | case OP_ONCE: |
3110 | case OP_ONCE_NC: |
3111 | /* Atomic sub-patterns and assertions can always auto-possessify their |
3112 | last iterator. */ |
3113 | return TRUE; |
3114 | } |
3115 | |
3116 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
3117 | continue; |
3118 | |
3119 | case OP_ONCE: |
3120 | case OP_ONCE_NC: |
3121 | case OP_BRA: |
3122 | case OP_CBRA: |
3123 | next_code = code + GET(code, 1); |
3124 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
3125 | |
3126 | while (*next_code == OP_ALT) |
3127 | { |
3128 | if (!compare_opcodes(code, utf, cd, base_list, base_end)) return FALSE; |
3129 | code = next_code + 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
3130 | next_code += GET(next_code, 1); |
3131 | } |
3132 | continue; |
3133 | |
3134 | case OP_BRAZERO: |
3135 | case OP_BRAMINZERO: |
3136 | |
3137 | next_code = code + 1; |
3138 | if (*next_code != OP_BRA && *next_code != OP_CBRA |
3139 | && *next_code != OP_ONCE && *next_code != OP_ONCE_NC) return FALSE; |
3140 | |
3141 | do next_code += GET(next_code, 1); while (*next_code == OP_ALT); |
3142 | |
3143 | /* The bracket content will be checked by the |
3144 | OP_BRA/OP_CBRA case above. */ |
3145 | next_code += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
3146 | if (!compare_opcodes(next_code, utf, cd, base_list, base_end)) |
3147 | return FALSE; |
3148 | |
3149 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
3150 | continue; |
3151 | } |
3152 | |
3153 | /* Check for a supported opcode, and load its properties. */ |
3154 | |
3155 | code = get_chr_property_list(code, utf, cd->fcc, list); |
3156 | if (code == NULL) return FALSE; /* Unsupported */ |
3157 | |
3158 | /* If either opcode is a small character list, set pointers for comparing |
3159 | characters from that list with another list, or with a property. */ |
3160 | |
3161 | if (base_list[0] == OP_CHAR) |
3162 | { |
3163 | chr_ptr = base_list + 2; |
3164 | list_ptr = list; |
3165 | } |
3166 | else if (list[0] == OP_CHAR) |
3167 | { |
3168 | chr_ptr = list + 2; |
3169 | list_ptr = base_list; |
3170 | } |
3171 | |
3172 | /* Character bitsets can also be compared to certain opcodes. */ |
3173 | |
3174 | else if (base_list[0] == OP_CLASS || list[0] == OP_CLASS |
3175 | #ifdef COMPILE_PCRE8 |
3176 | /* In 8 bit, non-UTF mode, OP_CLASS and OP_NCLASS are the same. */ |
3177 | || (!utf && (base_list[0] == OP_NCLASS || list[0] == OP_NCLASS)) |
3178 | #endif |
3179 | ) |
3180 | { |
3181 | #ifdef COMPILE_PCRE8 |
3182 | if (base_list[0] == OP_CLASS || (!utf && base_list[0] == OP_NCLASS)) |
3183 | #else |
3184 | if (base_list[0] == OP_CLASS) |
3185 | #endif |
3186 | { |
3187 | set1 = (pcre_uint32 *)(base_end - base_list[2]); |
3188 | list_ptr = list; |
3189 | } |
3190 | else |
3191 | { |
3192 | set1 = (pcre_uint32 *)(code - list[2]); |
3193 | list_ptr = base_list; |
3194 | } |
3195 | |
3196 | invert_bits = FALSE; |
3197 | switch(list_ptr[0]) |
3198 | { |
3199 | case OP_CLASS: |
3200 | case OP_NCLASS: |
3201 | set2 = (pcre_uint32 *) |
3202 | ((list_ptr == list ? code : base_end) - list_ptr[2]); |
3203 | break; |
3204 | |
3205 | /* OP_XCLASS cannot be supported here, because its bitset |
3206 | is not necessarily complete. E.g: [a-\0x{200}] is stored |
3207 | as a character range, and the appropriate bits are not set. */ |
3208 | |
3209 | case OP_NOT_DIGIT: |
3210 | invert_bits = TRUE; |
3211 | /* Fall through */ |
3212 | case OP_DIGIT: |
3213 | set2 = (pcre_uint32 *)(cd->cbits + cbit_digit); |
3214 | break; |
3215 | |
3216 | case OP_NOT_WHITESPACE: |
3217 | invert_bits = TRUE; |
3218 | /* Fall through */ |
3219 | case OP_WHITESPACE: |
3220 | set2 = (pcre_uint32 *)(cd->cbits + cbit_space); |
3221 | break; |
3222 | |
3223 | case OP_NOT_WORDCHAR: |
3224 | invert_bits = TRUE; |
3225 | /* Fall through */ |
3226 | case OP_WORDCHAR: |
3227 | set2 = (pcre_uint32 *)(cd->cbits + cbit_word); |
3228 | break; |
3229 | |
3230 | default: |
3231 | return FALSE; |
3232 | } |
3233 | |
3234 | /* Compare 4 bytes to improve speed. */ |
3235 | set_end = set1 + (32 / 4); |
3236 | if (invert_bits) |
3237 | { |
3238 | do |
3239 | { |
3240 | if ((*set1++ & ~(*set2++)) != 0) return FALSE; |
3241 | } |
3242 | while (set1 < set_end); |
3243 | } |
3244 | else |
3245 | { |
3246 | do |
3247 | { |
3248 | if ((*set1++ & *set2++) != 0) return FALSE; |
3249 | } |
3250 | while (set1 < set_end); |
3251 | } |
3252 | |
3253 | if (list[1] == 0) return TRUE; |
3254 | /* Might be an empty repeat. */ |
3255 | continue; |
3256 | } |
3257 | |
3258 | /* Some property combinations also acceptable. Unicode property opcodes are |
3259 | processed specially; the rest can be handled with a lookup table. */ |
3260 | |
3261 | else |
3262 | { |
3263 | pcre_uint32 leftop, rightop; |
3264 | |
3265 | leftop = base_list[0]; |
3266 | rightop = list[0]; |
3267 | |
3268 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
3269 | accepted = FALSE; /* Always set in non-unicode case. */ |
3270 | if (leftop == OP_PROP || leftop == OP_NOTPROP) |
3271 | { |
3272 | if (rightop == OP_EOD) |
3273 | accepted = TRUE; |
3274 | else if (rightop == OP_PROP || rightop == OP_NOTPROP) |
3275 | { |
3276 | int n; |
3277 | const pcre_uint8 *p; |
3278 | BOOL same = leftop == rightop; |
3279 | BOOL lisprop = leftop == OP_PROP; |
3280 | BOOL risprop = rightop == OP_PROP; |
3281 | BOOL bothprop = lisprop && risprop; |
3282 | |
3283 | /* There's a table that specifies how each combination is to be |
3284 | processed: |
3285 | 0 Always return FALSE (never auto-possessify) |
3286 | 1 Character groups are distinct (possessify if both are OP_PROP) |
3287 | 2 Check character categories in the same group (general or particular) |
3288 | 3 Return TRUE if the two opcodes are not the same |
3289 | ... see comments below |
3290 | */ |
3291 | |
3292 | n = propposstab[base_list[2]][list[2]]; |
3293 | switch(n) |
3294 | { |
3295 | case 0: break; |
3296 | case 1: accepted = bothprop; break; |
3297 | case 2: accepted = (base_list[3] == list[3]) != same; break; |
3298 | case 3: accepted = !same; break; |
3299 | |
3300 | case 4: /* Left general category, right particular category */ |
3301 | accepted = risprop && catposstab[base_list[3]][list[3]] == same; |
3302 | break; |
3303 | |
3304 | case 5: /* Right general category, left particular category */ |
3305 | accepted = lisprop && catposstab[list[3]][base_list[3]] == same; |
3306 | break; |
3307 | |
3308 | /* This code is logically tricky. Think hard before fiddling with it. |
3309 | The posspropstab table has four entries per row. Each row relates to |
3310 | one of PCRE's special properties such as ALNUM or SPACE or WORD. |
3311 | Only WORD actually needs all four entries, but using repeats for the |
3312 | others means they can all use the same code below. |
3313 | |
3314 | The first two entries in each row are Unicode general categories, and |
3315 | apply always, because all the characters they include are part of the |
3316 | PCRE character set. The third and fourth entries are a general and a |
3317 | particular category, respectively, that include one or more relevant |
3318 | characters. One or the other is used, depending on whether the check |
3319 | is for a general or a particular category. However, in both cases the |
3320 | category contains more characters than the specials that are defined |
3321 | for the property being tested against. Therefore, it cannot be used |
3322 | in a NOTPROP case. |
3323 | |
3324 | Example: the row for WORD contains ucp_L, ucp_N, ucp_P, ucp_Po. |
3325 | Underscore is covered by ucp_P or ucp_Po. */ |
3326 | |
3327 | case 6: /* Left alphanum vs right general category */ |
3328 | case 7: /* Left space vs right general category */ |
3329 | case 8: /* Left word vs right general category */ |
3330 | p = posspropstab[n-6]; |
3331 | accepted = risprop && lisprop == |
3332 | (list[3] != p[0] && |
3333 | list[3] != p[1] && |
3334 | (list[3] != p[2] || !lisprop)); |
3335 | break; |
3336 | |
3337 | case 9: /* Right alphanum vs left general category */ |
3338 | case 10: /* Right space vs left general category */ |
3339 | case 11: /* Right word vs left general category */ |
3340 | p = posspropstab[n-9]; |
3341 | accepted = lisprop && risprop == |
3342 | (base_list[3] != p[0] && |
3343 | base_list[3] != p[1] && |
3344 | (base_list[3] != p[2] || !risprop)); |
3345 | break; |
3346 | |
3347 | case 12: /* Left alphanum vs right particular category */ |
3348 | case 13: /* Left space vs right particular category */ |
3349 | case 14: /* Left word vs right particular category */ |
3350 | p = posspropstab[n-12]; |
3351 | accepted = risprop && lisprop == |
3352 | (catposstab[p[0]][list[3]] && |
3353 | catposstab[p[1]][list[3]] && |
3354 | (list[3] != p[3] || !lisprop)); |
3355 | break; |
3356 | |
3357 | case 15: /* Right alphanum vs left particular category */ |
3358 | case 16: /* Right space vs left particular category */ |
3359 | case 17: /* Right word vs left particular category */ |
3360 | p = posspropstab[n-15]; |
3361 | accepted = lisprop && risprop == |
3362 | (catposstab[p[0]][base_list[3]] && |
3363 | catposstab[p[1]][base_list[3]] && |
3364 | (base_list[3] != p[3] || !risprop)); |
3365 | break; |
3366 | } |
3367 | } |
3368 | } |
3369 | |
3370 | else |
3371 | #endif /* SUPPORT_UCP */ |
3372 | |
3373 | accepted = leftop >= FIRST_AUTOTAB_OP && leftop <= LAST_AUTOTAB_LEFT_OP && |
3374 | rightop >= FIRST_AUTOTAB_OP && rightop <= LAST_AUTOTAB_RIGHT_OP && |
3375 | autoposstab[leftop - FIRST_AUTOTAB_OP][rightop - FIRST_AUTOTAB_OP]; |
3376 | |
3377 | if (!accepted) |
3378 | return FALSE; |
3379 | |
3380 | if (list[1] == 0) return TRUE; |
3381 | /* Might be an empty repeat. */ |
3382 | continue; |
3383 | } |
3384 | |
3385 | /* Control reaches here only if one of the items is a small character list. |
3386 | All characters are checked against the other side. */ |
3387 | |
3388 | do |
3389 | { |
3390 | chr = *chr_ptr; |
3391 | |
3392 | switch(list_ptr[0]) |
3393 | { |
3394 | case OP_CHAR: |
3395 | ochr_ptr = list_ptr + 2; |
3396 | do |
3397 | { |
3398 | if (chr == *ochr_ptr) return FALSE; |
3399 | ochr_ptr++; |
3400 | } |
3401 | while(*ochr_ptr != NOTACHAR); |
3402 | break; |
3403 | |
3404 | case OP_NOT: |
3405 | ochr_ptr = list_ptr + 2; |
3406 | do |
3407 | { |
3408 | if (chr == *ochr_ptr) |
3409 | break; |
3410 | ochr_ptr++; |
3411 | } |
3412 | while(*ochr_ptr != NOTACHAR); |
3413 | if (*ochr_ptr == NOTACHAR) return FALSE; /* Not found */ |
3414 | break; |
3415 | |
3416 | /* Note that OP_DIGIT etc. are generated only when PCRE_UCP is *not* |
3417 | set. When it is set, \d etc. are converted into OP_(NOT_)PROP codes. */ |
3418 | |
3419 | case OP_DIGIT: |
3420 | if (chr < 256 && (cd->ctypes[chr] & ctype_digit) != 0) return FALSE; |
3421 | break; |
3422 | |
3423 | case OP_NOT_DIGIT: |
3424 | if (chr > 255 || (cd->ctypes[chr] & ctype_digit) == 0) return FALSE; |
3425 | break; |
3426 | |
3427 | case OP_WHITESPACE: |
3428 | if (chr < 256 && (cd->ctypes[chr] & ctype_space) != 0) return FALSE; |
3429 | break; |
3430 | |
3431 | case OP_NOT_WHITESPACE: |
3432 | if (chr > 255 || (cd->ctypes[chr] & ctype_space) == 0) return FALSE; |
3433 | break; |
3434 | |
3435 | case OP_WORDCHAR: |
3436 | if (chr < 255 && (cd->ctypes[chr] & ctype_word) != 0) return FALSE; |
3437 | break; |
3438 | |
3439 | case OP_NOT_WORDCHAR: |
3440 | if (chr > 255 || (cd->ctypes[chr] & ctype_word) == 0) return FALSE; |
3441 | break; |
3442 | |
3443 | case OP_HSPACE: |
3444 | switch(chr) |
3445 | { |
3446 | HSPACE_CASES: return FALSE; |
3447 | default: break; |
3448 | } |
3449 | break; |
3450 | |
3451 | case OP_NOT_HSPACE: |
3452 | switch(chr) |
3453 | { |
3454 | HSPACE_CASES: break; |
3455 | default: return FALSE; |
3456 | } |
3457 | break; |
3458 | |
3459 | case OP_ANYNL: |
3460 | case OP_VSPACE: |
3461 | switch(chr) |
3462 | { |
3463 | VSPACE_CASES: return FALSE; |
3464 | default: break; |
3465 | } |
3466 | break; |
3467 | |
3468 | case OP_NOT_VSPACE: |
3469 | switch(chr) |
3470 | { |
3471 | VSPACE_CASES: break; |
3472 | default: return FALSE; |
3473 | } |
3474 | break; |
3475 | |
3476 | case OP_DOLL: |
3477 | case OP_EODN: |
3478 | switch (chr) |
3479 | { |
3480 | case CHAR_CR: |
3481 | case CHAR_LF: |
3482 | case CHAR_VT: |
3483 | case CHAR_FF: |
3484 | case CHAR_NEL: |
3485 | #ifndef EBCDIC |
3486 | case 0x2028: |
3487 | case 0x2029: |
3488 | #endif /* Not EBCDIC */ |
3489 | return FALSE; |
3490 | } |
3491 | break; |
3492 | |
3493 | case OP_EOD: /* Can always possessify before \z */ |
3494 | break; |
3495 | |
3496 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
3497 | case OP_PROP: |
3498 | case OP_NOTPROP: |
3499 | if (!check_char_prop(chr, list_ptr[2], list_ptr[3], |
3500 | list_ptr[0] == OP_NOTPROP)) |
3501 | return FALSE; |
3502 | break; |
3503 | #endif |
3504 | |
3505 | case OP_NCLASS: |
3506 | if (chr > 255) return FALSE; |
3507 | /* Fall through */ |
3508 | |
3509 | case OP_CLASS: |
3510 | if (chr > 255) break; |
3511 | class_bitset = (pcre_uint8 *) |
3512 | ((list_ptr == list ? code : base_end) - list_ptr[2]); |
3513 | if ((class_bitset[chr >> 3] & (1 << (chr & 7))) != 0) return FALSE; |
3514 | break; |
3515 | |
3516 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
3517 | case OP_XCLASS: |
3518 | if (PRIV(xclass)(chr, (list_ptr == list ? code : base_end) - |
3519 | list_ptr[2] + LINK_SIZE, utf)) return FALSE; |
3520 | break; |
3521 | #endif |
3522 | |
3523 | default: |
3524 | return FALSE; |
3525 | } |
3526 | |
3527 | chr_ptr++; |
3528 | } |
3529 | while(*chr_ptr != NOTACHAR); |
3530 | |
3531 | /* At least one character must be matched from this opcode. */ |
3532 | |
3533 | if (list[1] == 0) return TRUE; |
3534 | } |
3535 | |
3536 | return FALSE; |
3537 | } |
3538 | |
3539 | |
3540 | |
3541 | /************************************************* |
3542 | * Scan compiled regex for auto-possession * |
3543 | *************************************************/ |
3544 | |
3545 | /* Replaces single character iterations with their possessive alternatives |
3546 | if appropriate. This function modifies the compiled opcode! |
3547 | |
3548 | Arguments: |
3549 | code points to start of the byte code |
3550 | utf TRUE in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
3551 | cd static compile data |
3552 | |
3553 | Returns: nothing |
3554 | */ |
3555 | |
3556 | static void |
3557 | auto_possessify(pcre_uchar *code, BOOL utf, const compile_data *cd) |
3558 | { |
3559 | register pcre_uchar c; |
3560 | const pcre_uchar *end; |
3561 | pcre_uchar *repeat_opcode; |
3562 | pcre_uint32 list[8]; |
3563 | |
3564 | for (;;) |
3565 | { |
3566 | c = *code; |
3567 | |
3568 | if (c >= OP_STAR && c <= OP_TYPEPOSUPTO) |
3569 | { |
3570 | c -= get_repeat_base(c) - OP_STAR; |
3571 | end = (c <= OP_MINUPTO) ? |
3572 | get_chr_property_list(code, utf, cd->fcc, list) : NULL; |
3573 | list[1] = c == OP_STAR || c == OP_PLUS || c == OP_QUERY || c == OP_UPTO; |
3574 | |
3575 | if (end != NULL && compare_opcodes(end, utf, cd, list, end)) |
3576 | { |
3577 | switch(c) |
3578 | { |
3579 | case OP_STAR: |
3580 | *code += OP_POSSTAR - OP_STAR; |
3581 | break; |
3582 | |
3583 | case OP_MINSTAR: |
3584 | *code += OP_POSSTAR - OP_MINSTAR; |
3585 | break; |
3586 | |
3587 | case OP_PLUS: |
3588 | *code += OP_POSPLUS - OP_PLUS; |
3589 | break; |
3590 | |
3591 | case OP_MINPLUS: |
3592 | *code += OP_POSPLUS - OP_MINPLUS; |
3593 | break; |
3594 | |
3595 | case OP_QUERY: |
3596 | *code += OP_POSQUERY - OP_QUERY; |
3597 | break; |
3598 | |
3599 | case OP_MINQUERY: |
3600 | *code += OP_POSQUERY - OP_MINQUERY; |
3601 | break; |
3602 | |
3603 | case OP_UPTO: |
3604 | *code += OP_POSUPTO - OP_UPTO; |
3605 | break; |
3606 | |
3607 | case OP_MINUPTO: |
3608 | *code += OP_MINUPTO - OP_UPTO; |
3609 | break; |
3610 | } |
3611 | } |
3612 | c = *code; |
3613 | } |
3614 | else if (c == OP_CLASS || c == OP_NCLASS || c == OP_XCLASS) |
3615 | { |
3616 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
3617 | if (c == OP_XCLASS) |
3618 | repeat_opcode = code + GET(code, 1); |
3619 | else |
3620 | #endif |
3621 | repeat_opcode = code + 1 + (32 / sizeof(pcre_uchar)); |
3622 | |
3623 | c = *repeat_opcode; |
3624 | if (c >= OP_CRSTAR && c <= OP_CRMINRANGE) |
3625 | { |
3626 | /* end must not be NULL. */ |
3627 | end = get_chr_property_list(code, utf, cd->fcc, list); |
3628 | |
3629 | list[1] = (c & 1) == 0; |
3630 | |
3631 | if (compare_opcodes(end, utf, cd, list, end)) |
3632 | { |
3633 | switch (c) |
3634 | { |
3635 | case OP_CRSTAR: |
3636 | case OP_CRMINSTAR: |
3637 | *repeat_opcode = OP_CRPOSSTAR; |
3638 | break; |
3639 | |
3640 | case OP_CRPLUS: |
3641 | case OP_CRMINPLUS: |
3642 | *repeat_opcode = OP_CRPOSPLUS; |
3643 | break; |
3644 | |
3645 | case OP_CRQUERY: |
3646 | case OP_CRMINQUERY: |
3647 | *repeat_opcode = OP_CRPOSQUERY; |
3648 | break; |
3649 | |
3650 | case OP_CRRANGE: |
3651 | case OP_CRMINRANGE: |
3652 | *repeat_opcode = OP_CRPOSRANGE; |
3653 | break; |
3654 | } |
3655 | } |
3656 | } |
3657 | c = *code; |
3658 | } |
3659 | |
3660 | switch(c) |
3661 | { |
3662 | case OP_END: |
3663 | return; |
3664 | |
3665 | case OP_TYPESTAR: |
3666 | case OP_TYPEMINSTAR: |
3667 | case OP_TYPEPLUS: |
3668 | case OP_TYPEMINPLUS: |
3669 | case OP_TYPEQUERY: |
3670 | case OP_TYPEMINQUERY: |
3671 | case OP_TYPEPOSSTAR: |
3672 | case OP_TYPEPOSPLUS: |
3673 | case OP_TYPEPOSQUERY: |
3674 | if (code[1] == OP_PROP || code[1] == OP_NOTPROP) code += 2; |
3675 | break; |
3676 | |
3677 | case OP_TYPEUPTO: |
3678 | case OP_TYPEMINUPTO: |
3679 | case OP_TYPEEXACT: |
3680 | case OP_TYPEPOSUPTO: |
3681 | if (code[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_PROP || code[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_NOTPROP) |
3682 | code += 2; |
3683 | break; |
3684 | |
3685 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
3686 | case OP_XCLASS: |
3687 | code += GET(code, 1); |
3688 | break; |
3689 | #endif |
3690 | |
3691 | case OP_MARK: |
3692 | case OP_PRUNE_ARG: |
3693 | case OP_SKIP_ARG: |
3694 | case OP_THEN_ARG: |
3695 | code += code[1]; |
3696 | break; |
3697 | } |
3698 | |
3699 | /* Add in the fixed length from the table */ |
3700 | |
3701 | code += PRIV(OP_lengths)[c]; |
3702 | |
3703 | /* In UTF-8 mode, opcodes that are followed by a character may be followed by |
3704 | a multi-byte character. The length in the table is a minimum, so we have to |
3705 | arrange to skip the extra bytes. */ |
3706 | |
3707 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
3708 | if (utf) switch(c) |
3709 | { |
3710 | case OP_CHAR: |
3711 | case OP_CHARI: |
3712 | case OP_NOT: |
3713 | case OP_NOTI: |
3714 | case OP_STAR: |
3715 | case OP_MINSTAR: |
3716 | case OP_PLUS: |
3717 | case OP_MINPLUS: |
3718 | case OP_QUERY: |
3719 | case OP_MINQUERY: |
3720 | case OP_UPTO: |
3721 | case OP_MINUPTO: |
3722 | case OP_EXACT: |
3723 | case OP_POSSTAR: |
3724 | case OP_POSPLUS: |
3725 | case OP_POSQUERY: |
3726 | case OP_POSUPTO: |
3727 | case OP_STARI: |
3728 | case OP_MINSTARI: |
3729 | case OP_PLUSI: |
3730 | case OP_MINPLUSI: |
3731 | case OP_QUERYI: |
3732 | case OP_MINQUERYI: |
3733 | case OP_UPTOI: |
3734 | case OP_MINUPTOI: |
3735 | case OP_EXACTI: |
3736 | case OP_POSSTARI: |
3737 | case OP_POSPLUSI: |
3738 | case OP_POSQUERYI: |
3739 | case OP_POSUPTOI: |
3740 | case OP_NOTSTAR: |
3741 | case OP_NOTMINSTAR: |
3742 | case OP_NOTPLUS: |
3743 | case OP_NOTMINPLUS: |
3744 | case OP_NOTQUERY: |
3745 | case OP_NOTMINQUERY: |
3746 | case OP_NOTUPTO: |
3747 | case OP_NOTMINUPTO: |
3748 | case OP_NOTEXACT: |
3749 | case OP_NOTPOSSTAR: |
3750 | case OP_NOTPOSPLUS: |
3751 | case OP_NOTPOSQUERY: |
3752 | case OP_NOTPOSUPTO: |
3753 | case OP_NOTSTARI: |
3754 | case OP_NOTMINSTARI: |
3755 | case OP_NOTPLUSI: |
3756 | case OP_NOTMINPLUSI: |
3757 | case OP_NOTQUERYI: |
3758 | case OP_NOTMINQUERYI: |
3759 | case OP_NOTUPTOI: |
3760 | case OP_NOTMINUPTOI: |
3761 | case OP_NOTEXACTI: |
3762 | case OP_NOTPOSSTARI: |
3763 | case OP_NOTPOSPLUSI: |
3764 | case OP_NOTPOSQUERYI: |
3765 | case OP_NOTPOSUPTOI: |
3766 | if (HAS_EXTRALEN(code[-1])) code += GET_EXTRALEN(code[-1]); |
3767 | break; |
3768 | } |
3769 | #else |
3770 | (void)(utf); /* Keep compiler happy by referencing function argument */ |
3771 | #endif |
3772 | } |
3773 | } |
3774 | |
3775 | |
3776 | |
3777 | /************************************************* |
3778 | * Check for POSIX class syntax * |
3779 | *************************************************/ |
3780 | |
3781 | /* This function is called when the sequence "[:" or "[." or "[=" is |
3782 | encountered in a character class. It checks whether this is followed by a |
3783 | sequence of characters terminated by a matching ":]" or ".]" or "=]". If we |
3784 | reach an unescaped ']' without the special preceding character, return FALSE. |
3785 | |
3786 | Originally, this function only recognized a sequence of letters between the |
3787 | terminators, but it seems that Perl recognizes any sequence of characters, |
3788 | though of course unknown POSIX names are subsequently rejected. Perl gives an |
3789 | "Unknown POSIX class" error for [:f\oo:] for example, where previously PCRE |
3790 | didn't consider this to be a POSIX class. Likewise for [:1234:]. |
3791 | |
3792 | The problem in trying to be exactly like Perl is in the handling of escapes. We |
3793 | have to be sure that [abc[:x\]pqr] is *not* treated as containing a POSIX |
3794 | class, but [abc[:x\]pqr:]] is (so that an error can be generated). The code |
3795 | below handles the special case of \], but does not try to do any other escape |
3796 | processing. This makes it different from Perl for cases such as [:l\ower:] |
3797 | where Perl recognizes it as the POSIX class "lower" but PCRE does not recognize |
3798 | "l\ower". This is a lesser evil than not diagnosing bad classes when Perl does, |
3799 | I think. |
3800 | |
3801 | A user pointed out that PCRE was rejecting [:a[:digit:]] whereas Perl was not. |
3802 | It seems that the appearance of a nested POSIX class supersedes an apparent |
3803 | external class. For example, [:a[:digit:]b:] matches "a", "b", ":", or |
3804 | a digit. |
3805 | |
3806 | In Perl, unescaped square brackets may also appear as part of class names. For |
3807 | example, [:a[:abc]b:] gives unknown POSIX class "[:abc]b:]". However, for |
3808 | [:a[:abc]b][b:] it gives unknown POSIX class "[:abc]b][b:]", which does not |
3809 | seem right at all. PCRE does not allow closing square brackets in POSIX class |
3810 | names. |
3811 | |
3812 | Arguments: |
3813 | ptr pointer to the initial [ |
3814 | endptr where to return the end pointer |
3815 | |
3816 | Returns: TRUE or FALSE |
3817 | */ |
3818 | |
3819 | static BOOL |
3820 | check_posix_syntax(const pcre_uchar *ptr, const pcre_uchar **endptr) |
3821 | { |
3822 | pcre_uchar terminator; /* Don't combine these lines; the Solaris cc */ |
3823 | terminator = *(++ptr); /* compiler warns about "non-constant" initializer. */ |
3824 | for (++ptr; *ptr != CHAR_NULL; ptr++) |
3825 | { |
3826 | if (*ptr == CHAR_BACKSLASH && ptr[1] == CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET) |
3827 | ptr++; |
3828 | else if (*ptr == CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET) return FALSE; |
3829 | else |
3830 | { |
3831 | if (*ptr == terminator && ptr[1] == CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET) |
3832 | { |
3833 | *endptr = ptr; |
3834 | return TRUE; |
3835 | } |
3836 | if (*ptr == CHAR_LEFT_SQUARE_BRACKET && |
3837 | (ptr[1] == CHAR_COLON || ptr[1] == CHAR_DOT || |
3838 | ptr[1] == CHAR_EQUALS_SIGN) && |
3839 | check_posix_syntax(ptr, endptr)) |
3840 | return FALSE; |
3841 | } |
3842 | } |
3843 | return FALSE; |
3844 | } |
3845 | |
3846 | |
3847 | |
3848 | |
3849 | /************************************************* |
3850 | * Check POSIX class name * |
3851 | *************************************************/ |
3852 | |
3853 | /* This function is called to check the name given in a POSIX-style class entry |
3854 | such as [:alnum:]. |
3855 | |
3856 | Arguments: |
3857 | ptr points to the first letter |
3858 | len the length of the name |
3859 | |
3860 | Returns: a value representing the name, or -1 if unknown |
3861 | */ |
3862 | |
3863 | static int |
3864 | check_posix_name(const pcre_uchar *ptr, int len) |
3865 | { |
3866 | const char *pn = posix_names; |
3867 | register int yield = 0; |
3868 | while (posix_name_lengths[yield] != 0) |
3869 | { |
3870 | if (len == posix_name_lengths[yield] && |
3871 | STRNCMP_UC_C8(ptr, pn, (unsigned int)len) == 0) return yield; |
3872 | pn += posix_name_lengths[yield] + 1; |
3873 | yield++; |
3874 | } |
3875 | return -1; |
3876 | } |
3877 | |
3878 | |
3879 | /************************************************* |
3880 | * Adjust OP_RECURSE items in repeated group * |
3881 | *************************************************/ |
3882 | |
3883 | /* OP_RECURSE items contain an offset from the start of the regex to the group |
3884 | that is referenced. This means that groups can be replicated for fixed |
3885 | repetition simply by copying (because the recursion is allowed to refer to |
3886 | earlier groups that are outside the current group). However, when a group is |
3887 | optional (i.e. the minimum quantifier is zero), OP_BRAZERO or OP_SKIPZERO is |
3888 | inserted before it, after it has been compiled. This means that any OP_RECURSE |
3889 | items within it that refer to the group itself or any contained groups have to |
3890 | have their offsets adjusted. That one of the jobs of this function. Before it |
3891 | is called, the partially compiled regex must be temporarily terminated with |
3892 | OP_END. |
3893 | |
3894 | This function has been extended with the possibility of forward references for |
3895 | recursions and subroutine calls. It must also check the list of such references |
3896 | for the group we are dealing with. If it finds that one of the recursions in |
3897 | the current group is on this list, it adjusts the offset in the list, not the |
3898 | value in the reference (which is a group number). |
3899 | |
3900 | Arguments: |
3901 | group points to the start of the group |
3902 | adjust the amount by which the group is to be moved |
3903 | utf TRUE in UTF-8 / UTF-16 / UTF-32 mode |
3904 | cd contains pointers to tables etc. |
3905 | save_hwm the hwm forward reference pointer at the start of the group |
3906 | |
3907 | Returns: nothing |
3908 | */ |
3909 | |
3910 | static void |
3911 | adjust_recurse(pcre_uchar *group, int adjust, BOOL utf, compile_data *cd, |
3912 | pcre_uchar *save_hwm) |
3913 | { |
3914 | pcre_uchar *ptr = group; |
3915 | |
3916 | while ((ptr = (pcre_uchar *)find_recurse(ptr, utf)) != NULL) |
3917 | { |
3918 | int offset; |
3919 | pcre_uchar *hc; |
3920 | |
3921 | /* See if this recursion is on the forward reference list. If so, adjust the |
3922 | reference. */ |
3923 | |
3924 | for (hc = save_hwm; hc < cd->hwm; hc += LINK_SIZE) |
3925 | { |
3926 | offset = (int)GET(hc, 0); |
3927 | if (cd->start_code + offset == ptr + 1) |
3928 | { |
3929 | PUT(hc, 0, offset + adjust); |
3930 | break; |
3931 | } |
3932 | } |
3933 | |
3934 | /* Otherwise, adjust the recursion offset if it's after the start of this |
3935 | group. */ |
3936 | |
3937 | if (hc >= cd->hwm) |
3938 | { |
3939 | offset = (int)GET(ptr, 1); |
3940 | if (cd->start_code + offset >= group) PUT(ptr, 1, offset + adjust); |
3941 | } |
3942 | |
3943 | ptr += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
3944 | } |
3945 | } |
3946 | |
3947 | |
3948 | |
3949 | /************************************************* |
3950 | * Insert an automatic callout point * |
3951 | *************************************************/ |
3952 | |
3953 | /* This function is called when the PCRE_AUTO_CALLOUT option is set, to insert |
3954 | callout points before each pattern item. |
3955 | |
3956 | Arguments: |
3957 | code current code pointer |
3958 | ptr current pattern pointer |
3959 | cd pointers to tables etc |
3960 | |
3961 | Returns: new code pointer |
3962 | */ |
3963 | |
3964 | static pcre_uchar * |
3965 | auto_callout(pcre_uchar *code, const pcre_uchar *ptr, compile_data *cd) |
3966 | { |
3967 | *code++ = OP_CALLOUT; |
3968 | *code++ = 255; |
3969 | PUT(code, 0, (int)(ptr - cd->start_pattern)); /* Pattern offset */ |
3970 | PUT(code, LINK_SIZE, 0); /* Default length */ |
3971 | return code + 2 * LINK_SIZE; |
3972 | } |
3973 | |
3974 | |
3975 | |
3976 | /************************************************* |
3977 | * Complete a callout item * |
3978 | *************************************************/ |
3979 | |
3980 | /* A callout item contains the length of the next item in the pattern, which |
3981 | we can't fill in till after we have reached the relevant point. This is used |
3982 | for both automatic and manual callouts. |
3983 | |
3984 | Arguments: |
3985 | previous_callout points to previous callout item |
3986 | ptr current pattern pointer |
3987 | cd pointers to tables etc |
3988 | |
3989 | Returns: nothing |
3990 | */ |
3991 | |
3992 | static void |
3993 | complete_callout(pcre_uchar *previous_callout, const pcre_uchar *ptr, compile_data *cd) |
3994 | { |
3995 | int length = (int)(ptr - cd->start_pattern - GET(previous_callout, 2)); |
3996 | PUT(previous_callout, 2 + LINK_SIZE, length); |
3997 | } |
3998 | |
3999 | |
4000 | |
4001 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
4002 | /************************************************* |
4003 | * Get othercase range * |
4004 | *************************************************/ |
4005 | |
4006 | /* This function is passed the start and end of a class range, in UTF-8 mode |
4007 | with UCP support. It searches up the characters, looking for ranges of |
4008 | characters in the "other" case. Each call returns the next one, updating the |
4009 | start address. A character with multiple other cases is returned on its own |
4010 | with a special return value. |
4011 | |
4012 | Arguments: |
4013 | cptr points to starting character value; updated |
4014 | d end value |
4015 | ocptr where to put start of othercase range |
4016 | odptr where to put end of othercase range |
4017 | |
4018 | Yield: -1 when no more |
4019 | 0 when a range is returned |
4020 | >0 the CASESET offset for char with multiple other cases |
4021 | in this case, ocptr contains the original |
4022 | */ |
4023 | |
4024 | static int |
4025 | get_othercase_range(pcre_uint32 *cptr, pcre_uint32 d, pcre_uint32 *ocptr, |
4026 | pcre_uint32 *odptr) |
4027 | { |
4028 | pcre_uint32 c, othercase, next; |
4029 | unsigned int co; |
4030 | |
4031 | /* Find the first character that has an other case. If it has multiple other |
4032 | cases, return its case offset value. */ |
4033 | |
4034 | for (c = *cptr; c <= d; c++) |
4035 | { |
4036 | if ((co = UCD_CASESET(c)) != 0) |
4037 | { |
4038 | *ocptr = c++; /* Character that has the set */ |
4039 | *cptr = c; /* Rest of input range */ |
4040 | return (int)co; |
4041 | } |
4042 | if ((othercase = UCD_OTHERCASE(c)) != c) break; |
4043 | } |
4044 | |
4045 | if (c > d) return -1; /* Reached end of range */ |
4046 | |
4047 | *ocptr = othercase; |
4048 | next = othercase + 1; |
4049 | |
4050 | for (++c; c <= d; c++) |
4051 | { |
4052 | if (UCD_OTHERCASE(c) != next) break; |
4053 | next++; |
4054 | } |
4055 | |
4056 | *odptr = next - 1; /* End of othercase range */ |
4057 | *cptr = c; /* Rest of input range */ |
4058 | return 0; |
4059 | } |
4060 | #endif /* SUPPORT_UCP */ |
4061 | |
4062 | |
4063 | |
4064 | /************************************************* |
4065 | * Add a character or range to a class * |
4066 | *************************************************/ |
4067 | |
4068 | /* This function packages up the logic of adding a character or range of |
4069 | characters to a class. The character values in the arguments will be within the |
4070 | valid values for the current mode (8-bit, 16-bit, UTF, etc). This function is |
4071 | mutually recursive with the function immediately below. |
4072 | |
4073 | Arguments: |
4074 | classbits the bit map for characters < 256 |
4075 | uchardptr points to the pointer for extra data |
4076 | options the options word |
4077 | cd contains pointers to tables etc. |
4078 | start start of range character |
4079 | end end of range character |
4080 | |
4081 | Returns: the number of < 256 characters added |
4082 | the pointer to extra data is updated |
4083 | */ |
4084 | |
4085 | static int |
4086 | add_to_class(pcre_uint8 *classbits, pcre_uchar **uchardptr, int options, |
4087 | compile_data *cd, pcre_uint32 start, pcre_uint32 end) |
4088 | { |
4089 | pcre_uint32 c; |
4090 | int n8 = 0; |
4091 | |
4092 | /* If caseless matching is required, scan the range and process alternate |
4093 | cases. In Unicode, there are 8-bit characters that have alternate cases that |
4094 | are greater than 255 and vice-versa. Sometimes we can just extend the original |
4095 | range. */ |
4096 | |
4097 | if ((options & PCRE_CASELESS) != 0) |
4098 | { |
4099 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
4100 | if ((options & PCRE_UTF8) != 0) |
4101 | { |
4102 | int rc; |
4103 | pcre_uint32 oc, od; |
4104 | |
4105 | options &= ~PCRE_CASELESS; /* Remove for recursive calls */ |
4106 | c = start; |
4107 | |
4108 | while ((rc = get_othercase_range(&c, end, &oc, &od)) >= 0) |
4109 | { |
4110 | /* Handle a single character that has more than one other case. */ |
4111 | |
4112 | if (rc > 0) n8 += add_list_to_class(classbits, uchardptr, options, cd, |
4113 | PRIV(ucd_caseless_sets) + rc, oc); |
4114 | |
4115 | /* Do nothing if the other case range is within the original range. */ |
4116 | |
4117 | else if (oc >= start && od <= end) continue; |
4118 | |
4119 | /* Extend the original range if there is overlap, noting that if oc < c, we |
4120 | can't have od > end because a subrange is always shorter than the basic |
4121 | range. Otherwise, use a recursive call to add the additional range. */ |
4122 | |
4123 | else if (oc < start && od >= start - 1) start = oc; /* Extend downwards */ |
4124 | else if (od > end && oc <= end + 1) end = od; /* Extend upwards */ |
4125 | else n8 += add_to_class(classbits, uchardptr, options, cd, oc, od); |
4126 | } |
4127 | } |
4128 | else |
4129 | #endif /* SUPPORT_UCP */ |
4130 | |
4131 | /* Not UTF-mode, or no UCP */ |
4132 | |
4133 | for (c = start; c <= end && c < 256; c++) |
4134 | { |
4135 | SETBIT(classbits, cd->fcc[c]); |
4136 | n8++; |
4137 | } |
4138 | } |
4139 | |
4140 | /* Now handle the original range. Adjust the final value according to the bit |
4141 | length - this means that the same lists of (e.g.) horizontal spaces can be used |
4142 | in all cases. */ |
4143 | |
4144 | #if defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
4145 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
4146 | if ((options & PCRE_UTF8) == 0) |
4147 | #endif |
4148 | if (end > 0xff) end = 0xff; |
4149 | |
4150 | #elif defined COMPILE_PCRE16 |
4151 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
4152 | if ((options & PCRE_UTF16) == 0) |
4153 | #endif |
4154 | if (end > 0xffff) end = 0xffff; |
4155 | |
4156 | #endif /* COMPILE_PCRE[8|16] */ |
4157 | |
4158 | /* If all characters are less than 256, use the bit map. Otherwise use extra |
4159 | data. */ |
4160 | |
4161 | if (end < 0x100) |
4162 | { |
4163 | for (c = start; c <= end; c++) |
4164 | { |
4165 | n8++; |
4166 | SETBIT(classbits, c); |
4167 | } |
4168 | } |
4169 | |
4170 | else |
4171 | { |
4172 | pcre_uchar *uchardata = *uchardptr; |
4173 | |
4174 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
4175 | if ((options & PCRE_UTF8) != 0) /* All UTFs use the same flag bit */ |
4176 | { |
4177 | if (start < end) |
4178 | { |
4179 | *uchardata++ = XCL_RANGE; |
4180 | uchardata += PRIV(ord2utf)(start, uchardata); |
4181 | uchardata += PRIV(ord2utf)(end, uchardata); |
4182 | } |
4183 | else if (start == end) |
4184 | { |
4185 | *uchardata++ = XCL_SINGLE; |
4186 | uchardata += PRIV(ord2utf)(start, uchardata); |
4187 | } |
4188 | } |
4189 | else |
4190 | #endif /* SUPPORT_UTF */ |
4191 | |
4192 | /* Without UTF support, character values are constrained by the bit length, |
4193 | and can only be > 256 for 16-bit and 32-bit libraries. */ |
4194 | |
4195 | #ifdef COMPILE_PCRE8 |
4196 | {} |
4197 | #else |
4198 | if (start < end) |
4199 | { |
4200 | *uchardata++ = XCL_RANGE; |
4201 | *uchardata++ = start; |
4202 | *uchardata++ = end; |
4203 | } |
4204 | else if (start == end) |
4205 | { |
4206 | *uchardata++ = XCL_SINGLE; |
4207 | *uchardata++ = start; |
4208 | } |
4209 | #endif |
4210 | |
4211 | *uchardptr = uchardata; /* Updata extra data pointer */ |
4212 | } |
4213 | |
4214 | return n8; /* Number of 8-bit characters */ |
4215 | } |
4216 | |
4217 | |
4218 | |
4219 | |
4220 | /************************************************* |
4221 | * Add a list of characters to a class * |
4222 | *************************************************/ |
4223 | |
4224 | /* This function is used for adding a list of case-equivalent characters to a |
4225 | class, and also for adding a list of horizontal or vertical whitespace. If the |
4226 | list is in order (which it should be), ranges of characters are detected and |
4227 | handled appropriately. This function is mutually recursive with the function |
4228 | above. |
4229 | |
4230 | Arguments: |
4231 | classbits the bit map for characters < 256 |
4232 | uchardptr points to the pointer for extra data |
4233 | options the options word |
4234 | cd contains pointers to tables etc. |
4235 | p points to row of 32-bit values, terminated by NOTACHAR |
4236 | except character to omit; this is used when adding lists of |
4237 | case-equivalent characters to avoid including the one we |
4238 | already know about |
4239 | |
4240 | Returns: the number of < 256 characters added |
4241 | the pointer to extra data is updated |
4242 | */ |
4243 | |
4244 | static int |
4245 | add_list_to_class(pcre_uint8 *classbits, pcre_uchar **uchardptr, int options, |
4246 | compile_data *cd, const pcre_uint32 *p, unsigned int except) |
4247 | { |
4248 | int n8 = 0; |
4249 | while (p[0] < NOTACHAR) |
4250 | { |
4251 | int n = 0; |
4252 | if (p[0] != except) |
4253 | { |
4254 | while(p[n+1] == p[0] + n + 1) n++; |
4255 | n8 += add_to_class(classbits, uchardptr, options, cd, p[0], p[n]); |
4256 | } |
4257 | p += n + 1; |
4258 | } |
4259 | return n8; |
4260 | } |
4261 | |
4262 | |
4263 | |
4264 | /************************************************* |
4265 | * Add characters not in a list to a class * |
4266 | *************************************************/ |
4267 | |
4268 | /* This function is used for adding the complement of a list of horizontal or |
4269 | vertical whitespace to a class. The list must be in order. |
4270 | |
4271 | Arguments: |
4272 | classbits the bit map for characters < 256 |
4273 | uchardptr points to the pointer for extra data |
4274 | options the options word |
4275 | cd contains pointers to tables etc. |
4276 | p points to row of 32-bit values, terminated by NOTACHAR |
4277 | |
4278 | Returns: the number of < 256 characters added |
4279 | the pointer to extra data is updated |
4280 | */ |
4281 | |
4282 | static int |
4283 | add_not_list_to_class(pcre_uint8 *classbits, pcre_uchar **uchardptr, |
4284 | int options, compile_data *cd, const pcre_uint32 *p) |
4285 | { |
4286 | BOOL utf = (options & PCRE_UTF8) != 0; |
4287 | int n8 = 0; |
4288 | if (p[0] > 0) |
4289 | n8 += add_to_class(classbits, uchardptr, options, cd, 0, p[0] - 1); |
4290 | while (p[0] < NOTACHAR) |
4291 | { |
4292 | while (p[1] == p[0] + 1) p++; |
4293 | n8 += add_to_class(classbits, uchardptr, options, cd, p[0] + 1, |
4294 | (p[1] == NOTACHAR) ? (utf ? 0x10ffffu : 0xffffffffu) : p[1] - 1); |
4295 | p++; |
4296 | } |
4297 | return n8; |
4298 | } |
4299 | |
4300 | |
4301 | |
4302 | /************************************************* |
4303 | * Compile one branch * |
4304 | *************************************************/ |
4305 | |
4306 | /* Scan the pattern, compiling it into the a vector. If the options are |
4307 | changed during the branch, the pointer is used to change the external options |
4308 | bits. This function is used during the pre-compile phase when we are trying |
4309 | to find out the amount of memory needed, as well as during the real compile |
4310 | phase. The value of lengthptr distinguishes the two phases. |
4311 | |
4312 | Arguments: |
4313 | optionsptr pointer to the option bits |
4314 | codeptr points to the pointer to the current code point |
4315 | ptrptr points to the current pattern pointer |
4316 | errorcodeptr points to error code variable |
4317 | firstcharptr place to put the first required character |
4318 | firstcharflagsptr place to put the first character flags, or a negative number |
4319 | reqcharptr place to put the last required character |
4320 | reqcharflagsptr place to put the last required character flags, or a negative number |
4321 | bcptr points to current branch chain |
4322 | cond_depth conditional nesting depth |
4323 | cd contains pointers to tables etc. |
4324 | lengthptr NULL during the real compile phase |
4325 | points to length accumulator during pre-compile phase |
4326 | |
4327 | Returns: TRUE on success |
4328 | FALSE, with *errorcodeptr set non-zero on error |
4329 | */ |
4330 | |
4331 | static BOOL |
4332 | compile_branch(int *optionsptr, pcre_uchar **codeptr, |
4333 | const pcre_uchar **ptrptr, int *errorcodeptr, |
4334 | pcre_uint32 *firstcharptr, pcre_int32 *firstcharflagsptr, |
4335 | pcre_uint32 *reqcharptr, pcre_int32 *reqcharflagsptr, |
4336 | branch_chain *bcptr, int cond_depth, |
4337 | compile_data *cd, int *lengthptr) |
4338 | { |
4339 | int repeat_type, op_type; |
4340 | int repeat_min = 0, repeat_max = 0; /* To please picky compilers */ |
4341 | int bravalue = 0; |
4342 | int greedy_default, greedy_non_default; |
4343 | pcre_uint32 firstchar, reqchar; |
4344 | pcre_int32 firstcharflags, reqcharflags; |
4345 | pcre_uint32 zeroreqchar, zerofirstchar; |
4346 | pcre_int32 zeroreqcharflags, zerofirstcharflags; |
4347 | pcre_int32 req_caseopt, reqvary, tempreqvary; |
4348 | int options = *optionsptr; /* May change dynamically */ |
4349 | int after_manual_callout = 0; |
4350 | int length_prevgroup = 0; |
4351 | register pcre_uint32 c; |
4352 | int escape; |
4353 | register pcre_uchar *code = *codeptr; |
4354 | pcre_uchar *last_code = code; |
4355 | pcre_uchar *orig_code = code; |
4356 | pcre_uchar *tempcode; |
4357 | BOOL inescq = FALSE; |
4358 | BOOL groupsetfirstchar = FALSE; |
4359 | const pcre_uchar *ptr = *ptrptr; |
4360 | const pcre_uchar *tempptr; |
4361 | const pcre_uchar *nestptr = NULL; |
4362 | pcre_uchar *previous = NULL; |
4363 | pcre_uchar *previous_callout = NULL; |
4364 | pcre_uchar *save_hwm = NULL; |
4365 | pcre_uint8 classbits[32]; |
4366 | |
4367 | /* We can fish out the UTF-8 setting once and for all into a BOOL, but we |
4368 | must not do this for other options (e.g. PCRE_EXTENDED) because they may change |
4369 | dynamically as we process the pattern. */ |
4370 | |
4371 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
4372 | /* PCRE_UTF[16|32] have the same value as PCRE_UTF8. */ |
4373 | BOOL utf = (options & PCRE_UTF8) != 0; |
4374 | #ifndef COMPILE_PCRE32 |
4375 | pcre_uchar utf_chars[6]; |
4376 | #endif |
4377 | #else |
4378 | BOOL utf = FALSE; |
4379 | #endif |
4380 | |
4381 | /* Helper variables for OP_XCLASS opcode (for characters > 255). We define |
4382 | class_uchardata always so that it can be passed to add_to_class() always, |
4383 | though it will not be used in non-UTF 8-bit cases. This avoids having to supply |
4384 | alternative calls for the different cases. */ |
4385 | |
4386 | pcre_uchar *class_uchardata; |
4387 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
4388 | BOOL xclass; |
4389 | pcre_uchar *class_uchardata_base; |
4390 | #endif |
4391 | |
4392 | #ifdef PCRE_DEBUG |
4393 | if (lengthptr != NULL) DPRINTF((">> start branch\n")); |
4394 | #endif |
4395 | |
4396 | /* Set up the default and non-default settings for greediness */ |
4397 | |
4398 | greedy_default = ((options & PCRE_UNGREEDY) != 0); |
4399 | greedy_non_default = greedy_default ^ 1; |
4400 | |
4401 | /* Initialize no first byte, no required byte. REQ_UNSET means "no char |
4402 | matching encountered yet". It gets changed to REQ_NONE if we hit something that |
4403 | matches a non-fixed char first char; reqchar just remains unset if we never |
4404 | find one. |
4405 | |
4406 | When we hit a repeat whose minimum is zero, we may have to adjust these values |
4407 | to take the zero repeat into account. This is implemented by setting them to |
4408 | zerofirstbyte and zeroreqchar when such a repeat is encountered. The individual |
4409 | item types that can be repeated set these backoff variables appropriately. */ |
4410 | |
4411 | firstchar = reqchar = zerofirstchar = zeroreqchar = 0; |
4412 | firstcharflags = reqcharflags = zerofirstcharflags = zeroreqcharflags = REQ_UNSET; |
4413 | |
4414 | /* The variable req_caseopt contains either the REQ_CASELESS value |
4415 | or zero, according to the current setting of the caseless flag. The |
4416 | REQ_CASELESS leaves the lower 28 bit empty. It is added into the |
4417 | firstchar or reqchar variables to record the case status of the |
4418 | value. This is used only for ASCII characters. */ |
4419 | |
4420 | req_caseopt = ((options & PCRE_CASELESS) != 0)? REQ_CASELESS:0; |
4421 | |
4422 | /* Switch on next character until the end of the branch */ |
4423 | |
4424 | for (;; ptr++) |
4425 | { |
4426 | BOOL negate_class; |
4427 | BOOL should_flip_negation; |
4428 | BOOL possessive_quantifier; |
4429 | BOOL is_quantifier; |
4430 | BOOL is_recurse; |
4431 | BOOL reset_bracount; |
4432 | int class_has_8bitchar; |
4433 | int class_one_char; |
4434 | int newoptions; |
4435 | int recno; |
4436 | int refsign; |
4437 | int skipbytes; |
4438 | pcre_uint32 subreqchar, subfirstchar; |
4439 | pcre_int32 subreqcharflags, subfirstcharflags; |
4440 | int terminator; |
4441 | unsigned int mclength; |
4442 | unsigned int tempbracount; |
4443 | pcre_uint32 ec; |
4444 | pcre_uchar mcbuffer[8]; |
4445 | |
4446 | /* Get next character in the pattern */ |
4447 | |
4448 | c = *ptr; |
4449 | |
4450 | /* If we are at the end of a nested substitution, revert to the outer level |
4451 | string. Nesting only happens one level deep. */ |
4452 | |
4453 | if (c == CHAR_NULL && nestptr != NULL) |
4454 | { |
4455 | ptr = nestptr; |
4456 | nestptr = NULL; |
4457 | c = *ptr; |
4458 | } |
4459 | |
4460 | /* If we are in the pre-compile phase, accumulate the length used for the |
4461 | previous cycle of this loop. */ |
4462 | |
4463 | if (lengthptr != NULL) |
4464 | { |
4465 | #ifdef PCRE_DEBUG |
4466 | if (code > cd->hwm) cd->hwm = code; /* High water info */ |
4467 | #endif |
4468 | if (code > cd->start_workspace + cd->workspace_size - |
4469 | WORK_SIZE_SAFETY_MARGIN) /* Check for overrun */ |
4470 | { |
4471 | *errorcodeptr = ERR52; |
4472 | goto FAILED; |
4473 | } |
4474 | |
4475 | /* There is at least one situation where code goes backwards: this is the |
4476 | case of a zero quantifier after a class (e.g. [ab]{0}). At compile time, |
4477 | the class is simply eliminated. However, it is created first, so we have to |
4478 | allow memory for it. Therefore, don't ever reduce the length at this point. |
4479 | */ |
4480 | |
4481 | if (code < last_code) code = last_code; |
4482 | |
4483 | /* Paranoid check for integer overflow */ |
4484 | |
4485 | if (OFLOW_MAX - *lengthptr < code - last_code) |
4486 | { |
4487 | *errorcodeptr = ERR20; |
4488 | goto FAILED; |
4489 | } |
4490 | |
4491 | *lengthptr += (int)(code - last_code); |
4492 | DPRINTF(("length=%d added %d c=%c (0x%x)\n", *lengthptr, |
4493 | (int)(code - last_code), c, c)); |
4494 | |
4495 | /* If "previous" is set and it is not at the start of the work space, move |
4496 | it back to there, in order to avoid filling up the work space. Otherwise, |
4497 | if "previous" is NULL, reset the current code pointer to the start. */ |
4498 | |
4499 | if (previous != NULL) |
4500 | { |
4501 | if (previous > orig_code) |
4502 | { |
4503 | memmove(orig_code, previous, IN_UCHARS(code - previous)); |
4504 | code -= previous - orig_code; |
4505 | previous = orig_code; |
4506 | } |
4507 | } |
4508 | else code = orig_code; |
4509 | |
4510 | /* Remember where this code item starts so we can pick up the length |
4511 | next time round. */ |
4512 | |
4513 | last_code = code; |
4514 | } |
4515 | |
4516 | /* In the real compile phase, just check the workspace used by the forward |
4517 | reference list. */ |
4518 | |
4519 | else if (cd->hwm > cd->start_workspace + cd->workspace_size - |
4520 | WORK_SIZE_SAFETY_MARGIN) |
4521 | { |
4522 | *errorcodeptr = ERR52; |
4523 | goto FAILED; |
4524 | } |
4525 | |
4526 | /* If in \Q...\E, check for the end; if not, we have a literal */ |
4527 | |
4528 | if (inescq && c != CHAR_NULL) |
4529 | { |
4530 | if (c == CHAR_BACKSLASH && ptr[1] == CHAR_E) |
4531 | { |
4532 | inescq = FALSE; |
4533 | ptr++; |
4534 | continue; |
4535 | } |
4536 | else |
4537 | { |
4538 | if (previous_callout != NULL) |
4539 | { |
4540 | if (lengthptr == NULL) /* Don't attempt in pre-compile phase */ |
4541 | complete_callout(previous_callout, ptr, cd); |
4542 | previous_callout = NULL; |
4543 | } |
4544 | if ((options & PCRE_AUTO_CALLOUT) != 0) |
4545 | { |
4546 | previous_callout = code; |
4547 | code = auto_callout(code, ptr, cd); |
4548 | } |
4549 | goto NORMAL_CHAR; |
4550 | } |
4551 | /* Control does not reach here. */ |
4552 | } |
4553 | |
4554 | /* In extended mode, skip white space and comments. We need a loop in order |
4555 | to check for more white space and more comments after a comment. */ |
4556 | |
4557 | if ((options & PCRE_EXTENDED) != 0) |
4558 | { |
4559 | for (;;) |
4560 | { |
4561 | while (MAX_255(c) && (cd->ctypes[c] & ctype_space) != 0) c = *(++ptr); |
4562 | if (c != CHAR_NUMBER_SIGN) break; |
4563 | ptr++; |
4564 | while (*ptr != CHAR_NULL) |
4565 | { |
4566 | if (IS_NEWLINE(ptr)) /* For non-fixed-length newline cases, */ |
4567 | { /* IS_NEWLINE sets cd->nllen. */ |
4568 | ptr += cd->nllen; |
4569 | break; |
4570 | } |
4571 | ptr++; |
4572 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
4573 | if (utf) FORWARDCHAR(ptr); |
4574 | #endif |
4575 | } |
4576 | c = *ptr; /* Either NULL or the char after a newline */ |
4577 | } |
4578 | } |
4579 | |
4580 | /* See if the next thing is a quantifier. */ |
4581 | |
4582 | is_quantifier = |
4583 | c == CHAR_ASTERISK || c == CHAR_PLUS || c == CHAR_QUESTION_MARK || |
4584 | (c == CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET && is_counted_repeat(ptr+1)); |
4585 | |
4586 | /* Fill in length of a previous callout, except when the next thing is a |
4587 | quantifier or when processing a property substitution string in UCP mode. */ |
4588 | |
4589 | if (!is_quantifier && previous_callout != NULL && nestptr == NULL && |
4590 | after_manual_callout-- <= 0) |
4591 | { |
4592 | if (lengthptr == NULL) /* Don't attempt in pre-compile phase */ |
4593 | complete_callout(previous_callout, ptr, cd); |
4594 | previous_callout = NULL; |
4595 | } |
4596 | |
4597 | /* Create auto callout, except for quantifiers, or while processing property |
4598 | strings that are substituted for \w etc in UCP mode. */ |
4599 | |
4600 | if ((options & PCRE_AUTO_CALLOUT) != 0 && !is_quantifier && nestptr == NULL) |
4601 | { |
4602 | previous_callout = code; |
4603 | code = auto_callout(code, ptr, cd); |
4604 | } |
4605 | |
4606 | /* Process the next pattern item. */ |
4607 | |
4608 | switch(c) |
4609 | { |
4610 | /* ===================================================================*/ |
4611 | case CHAR_NULL: /* The branch terminates at string end */ |
4612 | case CHAR_VERTICAL_LINE: /* or | or ) */ |
4613 | case CHAR_RIGHT_PARENTHESIS: |
4614 | *firstcharptr = firstchar; |
4615 | *firstcharflagsptr = firstcharflags; |
4616 | *reqcharptr = reqchar; |
4617 | *reqcharflagsptr = reqcharflags; |
4618 | *codeptr = code; |
4619 | *ptrptr = ptr; |
4620 | if (lengthptr != NULL) |
4621 | { |
4622 | if (OFLOW_MAX - *lengthptr < code - last_code) |
4623 | { |
4624 | *errorcodeptr = ERR20; |
4625 | goto FAILED; |
4626 | } |
4627 | *lengthptr += (int)(code - last_code); /* To include callout length */ |
4628 | DPRINTF((">> end branch\n")); |
4629 | } |
4630 | return TRUE; |
4631 | |
4632 | |
4633 | /* ===================================================================*/ |
4634 | /* Handle single-character metacharacters. In multiline mode, ^ disables |
4635 | the setting of any following char as a first character. */ |
4636 | |
4637 | case CHAR_CIRCUMFLEX_ACCENT: |
4638 | previous = NULL; |
4639 | if ((options & PCRE_MULTILINE) != 0) |
4640 | { |
4641 | if (firstcharflags == REQ_UNSET) firstcharflags = REQ_NONE; |
4642 | *code++ = OP_CIRCM; |
4643 | } |
4644 | else *code++ = OP_CIRC; |
4645 | break; |
4646 | |
4647 | case CHAR_DOLLAR_SIGN: |
4648 | previous = NULL; |
4649 | *code++ = ((options & PCRE_MULTILINE) != 0)? OP_DOLLM : OP_DOLL; |
4650 | break; |
4651 | |
4652 | /* There can never be a first char if '.' is first, whatever happens about |
4653 | repeats. The value of reqchar doesn't change either. */ |
4654 | |
4655 | case CHAR_DOT: |
4656 | if (firstcharflags == REQ_UNSET) firstcharflags = REQ_NONE; |
4657 | zerofirstchar = firstchar; |
4658 | zerofirstcharflags = firstcharflags; |
4659 | zeroreqchar = reqchar; |
4660 | zeroreqcharflags = reqcharflags; |
4661 | previous = code; |
4662 | *code++ = ((options & PCRE_DOTALL) != 0)? OP_ALLANY: OP_ANY; |
4663 | break; |
4664 | |
4665 | |
4666 | /* ===================================================================*/ |
4667 | /* Character classes. If the included characters are all < 256, we build a |
4668 | 32-byte bitmap of the permitted characters, except in the special case |
4669 | where there is only one such character. For negated classes, we build the |
4670 | map as usual, then invert it at the end. However, we use a different opcode |
4671 | so that data characters > 255 can be handled correctly. |
4672 | |
4673 | If the class contains characters outside the 0-255 range, a different |
4674 | opcode is compiled. It may optionally have a bit map for characters < 256, |
4675 | but those above are are explicitly listed afterwards. A flag byte tells |
4676 | whether the bitmap is present, and whether this is a negated class or not. |
4677 | |
4678 | In JavaScript compatibility mode, an isolated ']' causes an error. In |
4679 | default (Perl) mode, it is treated as a data character. */ |
4680 | |
4681 | case CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET: |
4682 | if ((cd->external_options & PCRE_JAVASCRIPT_COMPAT) != 0) |
4683 | { |
4684 | *errorcodeptr = ERR64; |
4685 | goto FAILED; |
4686 | } |
4687 | goto NORMAL_CHAR; |
4688 | |
4689 | case CHAR_LEFT_SQUARE_BRACKET: |
4690 | previous = code; |
4691 | |
4692 | /* PCRE supports POSIX class stuff inside a class. Perl gives an error if |
4693 | they are encountered at the top level, so we'll do that too. */ |
4694 | |
4695 | if ((ptr[1] == CHAR_COLON || ptr[1] == CHAR_DOT || |
4696 | ptr[1] == CHAR_EQUALS_SIGN) && |
4697 | check_posix_syntax(ptr, &tempptr)) |
4698 | { |
4699 | *errorcodeptr = (ptr[1] == CHAR_COLON)? ERR13 : ERR31; |
4700 | goto FAILED; |
4701 | } |
4702 | |
4703 | /* If the first character is '^', set the negation flag and skip it. Also, |
4704 | if the first few characters (either before or after ^) are \Q\E or \E we |
4705 | skip them too. This makes for compatibility with Perl. */ |
4706 | |
4707 | negate_class = FALSE; |
4708 | for (;;) |
4709 | { |
4710 | c = *(++ptr); |
4711 | if (c == CHAR_BACKSLASH) |
4712 | { |
4713 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_E) |
4714 | ptr++; |
4715 | else if (STRNCMP_UC_C8(ptr + 1, STR_Q STR_BACKSLASH STR_E, 3) == 0) |
4716 | ptr += 3; |
4717 | else |
4718 | break; |
4719 | } |
4720 | else if (!negate_class && c == CHAR_CIRCUMFLEX_ACCENT) |
4721 | negate_class = TRUE; |
4722 | else break; |
4723 | } |
4724 | |
4725 | /* Empty classes are allowed in JavaScript compatibility mode. Otherwise, |
4726 | an initial ']' is taken as a data character -- the code below handles |
4727 | that. In JS mode, [] must always fail, so generate OP_FAIL, whereas |
4728 | [^] must match any character, so generate OP_ALLANY. */ |
4729 | |
4730 | if (c == CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET && |
4731 | (cd->external_options & PCRE_JAVASCRIPT_COMPAT) != 0) |
4732 | { |
4733 | *code++ = negate_class? OP_ALLANY : OP_FAIL; |
4734 | if (firstcharflags == REQ_UNSET) firstcharflags = REQ_NONE; |
4735 | zerofirstchar = firstchar; |
4736 | zerofirstcharflags = firstcharflags; |
4737 | break; |
4738 | } |
4739 | |
4740 | /* If a class contains a negative special such as \S, we need to flip the |
4741 | negation flag at the end, so that support for characters > 255 works |
4742 | correctly (they are all included in the class). */ |
4743 | |
4744 | should_flip_negation = FALSE; |
4745 | |
4746 | /* For optimization purposes, we track some properties of the class: |
4747 | class_has_8bitchar will be non-zero if the class contains at least one < |
4748 | 256 character; class_one_char will be 1 if the class contains just one |
4749 | character. */ |
4750 | |
4751 | class_has_8bitchar = 0; |
4752 | class_one_char = 0; |
4753 | |
4754 | /* Initialize the 32-char bit map to all zeros. We build the map in a |
4755 | temporary bit of memory, in case the class contains fewer than two |
4756 | 8-bit characters because in that case the compiled code doesn't use the bit |
4757 | map. */ |
4758 | |
4759 | memset(classbits, 0, 32 * sizeof(pcre_uint8)); |
4760 | |
4761 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
4762 | xclass = FALSE; |
4763 | class_uchardata = code + LINK_SIZE + 2; /* For XCLASS items */ |
4764 | class_uchardata_base = class_uchardata; /* Save the start */ |
4765 | #endif |
4766 | |
4767 | /* Process characters until ] is reached. By writing this as a "do" it |
4768 | means that an initial ] is taken as a data character. At the start of the |
4769 | loop, c contains the first byte of the character. */ |
4770 | |
4771 | if (c != CHAR_NULL) do |
4772 | { |
4773 | const pcre_uchar *oldptr; |
4774 | |
4775 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
4776 | if (utf && HAS_EXTRALEN(c)) |
4777 | { /* Braces are required because the */ |
4778 | GETCHARLEN(c, ptr, ptr); /* macro generates multiple statements */ |
4779 | } |
4780 | #endif |
4781 | |
4782 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
4783 | /* In the pre-compile phase, accumulate the length of any extra |
4784 | data and reset the pointer. This is so that very large classes that |
4785 | contain a zillion > 255 characters no longer overwrite the work space |
4786 | (which is on the stack). We have to remember that there was XCLASS data, |
4787 | however. */ |
4788 | |
4789 | if (lengthptr != NULL && class_uchardata > class_uchardata_base) |
4790 | { |
4791 | xclass = TRUE; |
4792 | *lengthptr += class_uchardata - class_uchardata_base; |
4793 | class_uchardata = class_uchardata_base; |
4794 | } |
4795 | #endif |
4796 | |
4797 | /* Inside \Q...\E everything is literal except \E */ |
4798 | |
4799 | if (inescq) |
4800 | { |
4801 | if (c == CHAR_BACKSLASH && ptr[1] == CHAR_E) /* If we are at \E */ |
4802 | { |
4803 | inescq = FALSE; /* Reset literal state */ |
4804 | ptr++; /* Skip the 'E' */ |
4805 | continue; /* Carry on with next */ |
4806 | } |
4807 | goto CHECK_RANGE; /* Could be range if \E follows */ |
4808 | } |
4809 | |
4810 | /* Handle POSIX class names. Perl allows a negation extension of the |
4811 | form [:^name:]. A square bracket that doesn't match the syntax is |
4812 | treated as a literal. We also recognize the POSIX constructions |
4813 | [.ch.] and [=ch=] ("collating elements") and fault them, as Perl |
4814 | 5.6 and 5.8 do. */ |
4815 | |
4816 | if (c == CHAR_LEFT_SQUARE_BRACKET && |
4817 | (ptr[1] == CHAR_COLON || ptr[1] == CHAR_DOT || |
4818 | ptr[1] == CHAR_EQUALS_SIGN) && check_posix_syntax(ptr, &tempptr)) |
4819 | { |
4820 | BOOL local_negate = FALSE; |
4821 | int posix_class, taboffset, tabopt; |
4822 | register const pcre_uint8 *cbits = cd->cbits; |
4823 | pcre_uint8 pbits[32]; |
4824 | |
4825 | if (ptr[1] != CHAR_COLON) |
4826 | { |
4827 | *errorcodeptr = ERR31; |
4828 | goto FAILED; |
4829 | } |
4830 | |
4831 | ptr += 2; |
4832 | if (*ptr == CHAR_CIRCUMFLEX_ACCENT) |
4833 | { |
4834 | local_negate = TRUE; |
4835 | should_flip_negation = TRUE; /* Note negative special */ |
4836 | ptr++; |
4837 | } |
4838 | |
4839 | posix_class = check_posix_name(ptr, (int)(tempptr - ptr)); |
4840 | if (posix_class < 0) |
4841 | { |
4842 | *errorcodeptr = ERR30; |
4843 | goto FAILED; |
4844 | } |
4845 | |
4846 | /* If matching is caseless, upper and lower are converted to |
4847 | alpha. This relies on the fact that the class table starts with |
4848 | alpha, lower, upper as the first 3 entries. */ |
4849 | |
4850 | if ((options & PCRE_CASELESS) != 0 && posix_class <= 2) |
4851 | posix_class = 0; |
4852 | |
4853 | /* When PCRE_UCP is set, some of the POSIX classes are converted to |
4854 | different escape sequences that use Unicode properties \p or \P. Others |
4855 | that are not available via \p or \P generate XCL_PROP/XCL_NOTPROP |
4856 | directly. */ |
4857 | |
4858 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
4859 | if ((options & PCRE_UCP) != 0) |
4860 | { |
4861 | unsigned int ptype = 0; |
4862 | int pc = posix_class + ((local_negate)? POSIX_SUBSIZE/2 : 0); |
4863 | |
4864 | /* The posix_substitutes table specifies which POSIX classes can be |
4865 | converted to \p or \P items. */ |
4866 | |
4867 | if (posix_substitutes[pc] != NULL) |
4868 | { |
4869 | nestptr = tempptr + 1; |
4870 | ptr = posix_substitutes[pc] - 1; |
4871 | continue; |
4872 | } |
4873 | |
4874 | /* There are three other classes that generate special property calls |
4875 | that are recognized only in an XCLASS. */ |
4876 | |
4877 | else switch(posix_class) |
4878 | { |
4879 | case PC_GRAPH: |
4880 | ptype = PT_PXGRAPH; |
4881 | /* Fall through */ |
4882 | case PC_PRINT: |
4883 | if (ptype == 0) ptype = PT_PXPRINT; |
4884 | /* Fall through */ |
4885 | case PC_PUNCT: |
4886 | if (ptype == 0) ptype = PT_PXPUNCT; |
4887 | *class_uchardata++ = local_negate? XCL_NOTPROP : XCL_PROP; |
4888 | *class_uchardata++ = ptype; |
4889 | *class_uchardata++ = 0; |
4890 | ptr = tempptr + 1; |
4891 | continue; |
4892 | |
4893 | /* For all other POSIX classes, no special action is taken in UCP |
4894 | mode. Fall through to the non_UCP case. */ |
4895 | |
4896 | default: |
4897 | break; |
4898 | } |
4899 | } |
4900 | #endif |
4901 | /* In the non-UCP case, or when UCP makes no difference, we build the |
4902 | bit map for the POSIX class in a chunk of local store because we may be |
4903 | adding and subtracting from it, and we don't want to subtract bits that |
4904 | may be in the main map already. At the end we or the result into the |
4905 | bit map that is being built. */ |
4906 | |
4907 | posix_class *= 3; |
4908 | |
4909 | /* Copy in the first table (always present) */ |
4910 | |
4911 | memcpy(pbits, cbits + posix_class_maps[posix_class], |
4912 | 32 * sizeof(pcre_uint8)); |
4913 | |
4914 | /* If there is a second table, add or remove it as required. */ |
4915 | |
4916 | taboffset = posix_class_maps[posix_class + 1]; |
4917 | tabopt = posix_class_maps[posix_class + 2]; |
4918 | |
4919 | if (taboffset >= 0) |
4920 | { |
4921 | if (tabopt >= 0) |
4922 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) pbits[c] |= cbits[c + taboffset]; |
4923 | else |
4924 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) pbits[c] &= ~cbits[c + taboffset]; |
4925 | } |
4926 | |
4927 | /* Now see if we need to remove any special characters. An option |
4928 | value of 1 removes vertical space and 2 removes underscore. */ |
4929 | |
4930 | if (tabopt < 0) tabopt = -tabopt; |
4931 | if (tabopt == 1) pbits[1] &= ~0x3c; |
4932 | else if (tabopt == 2) pbits[11] &= 0x7f; |
4933 | |
4934 | /* Add the POSIX table or its complement into the main table that is |
4935 | being built and we are done. */ |
4936 | |
4937 | if (local_negate) |
4938 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] |= ~pbits[c]; |
4939 | else |
4940 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] |= pbits[c]; |
4941 | |
4942 | ptr = tempptr + 1; |
4943 | /* Every class contains at least one < 256 character. */ |
4944 | class_has_8bitchar = 1; |
4945 | /* Every class contains at least two characters. */ |
4946 | class_one_char = 2; |
4947 | continue; /* End of POSIX syntax handling */ |
4948 | } |
4949 | |
4950 | /* Backslash may introduce a single character, or it may introduce one |
4951 | of the specials, which just set a flag. The sequence \b is a special |
4952 | case. Inside a class (and only there) it is treated as backspace. We |
4953 | assume that other escapes have more than one character in them, so |
4954 | speculatively set both class_has_8bitchar and class_one_char bigger |
4955 | than one. Unrecognized escapes fall through and are either treated |
4956 | as literal characters (by default), or are faulted if |
4957 | PCRE_EXTRA is set. */ |
4958 | |
4959 | if (c == CHAR_BACKSLASH) |
4960 | { |
4961 | escape = check_escape(&ptr, &ec, errorcodeptr, cd->bracount, options, |
4962 | TRUE); |
4963 | if (*errorcodeptr != 0) goto FAILED; |
4964 | if (escape == 0) c = ec; |
4965 | else if (escape == ESC_b) c = CHAR_BS; /* \b is backspace in a class */ |
4966 | else if (escape == ESC_N) /* \N is not supported in a class */ |
4967 | { |
4968 | *errorcodeptr = ERR71; |
4969 | goto FAILED; |
4970 | } |
4971 | else if (escape == ESC_Q) /* Handle start of quoted string */ |
4972 | { |
4973 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_BACKSLASH && ptr[2] == CHAR_E) |
4974 | { |
4975 | ptr += 2; /* avoid empty string */ |
4976 | } |
4977 | else inescq = TRUE; |
4978 | continue; |
4979 | } |
4980 | else if (escape == ESC_E) continue; /* Ignore orphan \E */ |
4981 | |
4982 | else |
4983 | { |
4984 | register const pcre_uint8 *cbits = cd->cbits; |
4985 | /* Every class contains at least two < 256 characters. */ |
4986 | class_has_8bitchar++; |
4987 | /* Every class contains at least two characters. */ |
4988 | class_one_char += 2; |
4989 | |
4990 | switch (escape) |
4991 | { |
4992 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
4993 | case ESC_du: /* These are the values given for \d etc */ |
4994 | case ESC_DU: /* when PCRE_UCP is set. We replace the */ |
4995 | case ESC_wu: /* escape sequence with an appropriate \p */ |
4996 | case ESC_WU: /* or \P to test Unicode properties instead */ |
4997 | case ESC_su: /* of the default ASCII testing. */ |
4998 | case ESC_SU: |
4999 | nestptr = ptr; |
5000 | ptr = substitutes[escape - ESC_DU] - 1; /* Just before substitute */ |
5001 | class_has_8bitchar--; /* Undo! */ |
5002 | continue; |
5003 | #endif |
5004 | case ESC_d: |
5005 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] |= cbits[c+cbit_digit]; |
5006 | continue; |
5007 | |
5008 | case ESC_D: |
5009 | should_flip_negation = TRUE; |
5010 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] |= ~cbits[c+cbit_digit]; |
5011 | continue; |
5012 | |
5013 | case ESC_w: |
5014 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] |= cbits[c+cbit_word]; |
5015 | continue; |
5016 | |
5017 | case ESC_W: |
5018 | should_flip_negation = TRUE; |
5019 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] |= ~cbits[c+cbit_word]; |
5020 | continue; |
5021 | |
5022 | /* Perl 5.004 onwards omitted VT from \s, but restored it at Perl |
5023 | 5.18. Before PCRE 8.34, we had to preserve the VT bit if it was |
5024 | previously set by something earlier in the character class. |
5025 | Luckily, the value of CHAR_VT is 0x0b in both ASCII and EBCDIC, so |
5026 | we could just adjust the appropriate bit. From PCRE 8.34 we no |
5027 | longer treat \s and \S specially. */ |
5028 | |
5029 | case ESC_s: |
5030 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] |= cbits[c+cbit_space]; |
5031 | continue; |
5032 | |
5033 | case ESC_S: |
5034 | should_flip_negation = TRUE; |
5035 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] |= ~cbits[c+cbit_space]; |
5036 | continue; |
5037 | |
5038 | /* The rest apply in both UCP and non-UCP cases. */ |
5039 | |
5040 | case ESC_h: |
5041 | (void)add_list_to_class(classbits, &class_uchardata, options, cd, |
5042 | PRIV(hspace_list), NOTACHAR); |
5043 | continue; |
5044 | |
5045 | case ESC_H: |
5046 | (void)add_not_list_to_class(classbits, &class_uchardata, options, |
5047 | cd, PRIV(hspace_list)); |
5048 | continue; |
5049 | |
5050 | case ESC_v: |
5051 | (void)add_list_to_class(classbits, &class_uchardata, options, cd, |
5052 | PRIV(vspace_list), NOTACHAR); |
5053 | continue; |
5054 | |
5055 | case ESC_V: |
5056 | (void)add_not_list_to_class(classbits, &class_uchardata, options, |
5057 | cd, PRIV(vspace_list)); |
5058 | continue; |
5059 | |
5060 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
5061 | case ESC_p: |
5062 | case ESC_P: |
5063 | { |
5064 | BOOL negated; |
5065 | unsigned int ptype = 0, pdata = 0; |
5066 | if (!get_ucp(&ptr, &negated, &ptype, &pdata, errorcodeptr)) |
5067 | goto FAILED; |
5068 | *class_uchardata++ = ((escape == ESC_p) != negated)? |
5069 | XCL_PROP : XCL_NOTPROP; |
5070 | *class_uchardata++ = ptype; |
5071 | *class_uchardata++ = pdata; |
5072 | class_has_8bitchar--; /* Undo! */ |
5073 | continue; |
5074 | } |
5075 | #endif |
5076 | /* Unrecognized escapes are faulted if PCRE is running in its |
5077 | strict mode. By default, for compatibility with Perl, they are |
5078 | treated as literals. */ |
5079 | |
5080 | default: |
5081 | if ((options & PCRE_EXTRA) != 0) |
5082 | { |
5083 | *errorcodeptr = ERR7; |
5084 | goto FAILED; |
5085 | } |
5086 | class_has_8bitchar--; /* Undo the speculative increase. */ |
5087 | class_one_char -= 2; /* Undo the speculative increase. */ |
5088 | c = *ptr; /* Get the final character and fall through */ |
5089 | break; |
5090 | } |
5091 | } |
5092 | |
5093 | /* Fall through if the escape just defined a single character (c >= 0). |
5094 | This may be greater than 256. */ |
5095 | |
5096 | escape = 0; |
5097 | |
5098 | } /* End of backslash handling */ |
5099 | |
5100 | /* A character may be followed by '-' to form a range. However, Perl does |
5101 | not permit ']' to be the end of the range. A '-' character at the end is |
5102 | treated as a literal. Perl ignores orphaned \E sequences entirely. The |
5103 | code for handling \Q and \E is messy. */ |
5104 | |
5105 | CHECK_RANGE: |
5106 | while (ptr[1] == CHAR_BACKSLASH && ptr[2] == CHAR_E) |
5107 | { |
5108 | inescq = FALSE; |
5109 | ptr += 2; |
5110 | } |
5111 | oldptr = ptr; |
5112 | |
5113 | /* Remember if \r or \n were explicitly used */ |
5114 | |
5115 | if (c == CHAR_CR || c == CHAR_NL) cd->external_flags |= PCRE_HASCRORLF; |
5116 | |
5117 | /* Check for range */ |
5118 | |
5119 | if (!inescq && ptr[1] == CHAR_MINUS) |
5120 | { |
5121 | pcre_uint32 d; |
5122 | ptr += 2; |
5123 | while (*ptr == CHAR_BACKSLASH && ptr[1] == CHAR_E) ptr += 2; |
5124 | |
5125 | /* If we hit \Q (not followed by \E) at this point, go into escaped |
5126 | mode. */ |
5127 | |
5128 | while (*ptr == CHAR_BACKSLASH && ptr[1] == CHAR_Q) |
5129 | { |
5130 | ptr += 2; |
5131 | if (*ptr == CHAR_BACKSLASH && ptr[1] == CHAR_E) |
5132 | { ptr += 2; continue; } |
5133 | inescq = TRUE; |
5134 | break; |
5135 | } |
5136 | |
5137 | /* Minus (hyphen) at the end of a class is treated as a literal, so put |
5138 | back the pointer and jump to handle the character that preceded it. */ |
5139 | |
5140 | if (*ptr == CHAR_NULL || (!inescq && *ptr == CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET)) |
5141 | { |
5142 | ptr = oldptr; |
5143 | goto CLASS_SINGLE_CHARACTER; |
5144 | } |
5145 | |
5146 | /* Otherwise, we have a potential range; pick up the next character */ |
5147 | |
5148 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
5149 | if (utf) |
5150 | { /* Braces are required because the */ |
5151 | GETCHARLEN(d, ptr, ptr); /* macro generates multiple statements */ |
5152 | } |
5153 | else |
5154 | #endif |
5155 | d = *ptr; /* Not UTF-8 mode */ |
5156 | |
5157 | /* The second part of a range can be a single-character escape |
5158 | sequence, but not any of the other escapes. Perl treats a hyphen as a |
5159 | literal in such circumstances. However, in Perl's warning mode, a |
5160 | warning is given, so PCRE now faults it as it is almost certainly a |
5161 | mistake on the user's part. */ |
5162 | |
5163 | if (!inescq) |
5164 | { |
5165 | if (d == CHAR_BACKSLASH) |
5166 | { |
5167 | int descape; |
5168 | descape = check_escape(&ptr, &d, errorcodeptr, cd->bracount, options, TRUE); |
5169 | if (*errorcodeptr != 0) goto FAILED; |
5170 | |
5171 | /* 0 means a character was put into d; \b is backspace; any other |
5172 | special causes an error. */ |
5173 | |
5174 | if (descape != 0) |
5175 | { |
5176 | if (descape == ESC_b) d = CHAR_BS; else |
5177 | { |
5178 | *errorcodeptr = ERR83; |
5179 | goto FAILED; |
5180 | } |
5181 | } |
5182 | } |
5183 | |
5184 | /* A hyphen followed by a POSIX class is treated in the same way. */ |
5185 | |
5186 | else if (d == CHAR_LEFT_SQUARE_BRACKET && |
5187 | (ptr[1] == CHAR_COLON || ptr[1] == CHAR_DOT || |
5188 | ptr[1] == CHAR_EQUALS_SIGN) && |
5189 | check_posix_syntax(ptr, &tempptr)) |
5190 | { |
5191 | *errorcodeptr = ERR83; |
5192 | goto FAILED; |
5193 | } |
5194 | } |
5195 | |
5196 | /* Check that the two values are in the correct order. Optimize |
5197 | one-character ranges. */ |
5198 | |
5199 | if (d < c) |
5200 | { |
5201 | *errorcodeptr = ERR8; |
5202 | goto FAILED; |
5203 | } |
5204 | if (d == c) goto CLASS_SINGLE_CHARACTER; /* A few lines below */ |
5205 | |
5206 | /* We have found a character range, so single character optimizations |
5207 | cannot be done anymore. Any value greater than 1 indicates that there |
5208 | is more than one character. */ |
5209 | |
5210 | class_one_char = 2; |
5211 | |
5212 | /* Remember an explicit \r or \n, and add the range to the class. */ |
5213 | |
5214 | if (d == CHAR_CR || d == CHAR_NL) cd->external_flags |= PCRE_HASCRORLF; |
5215 | |
5216 | class_has_8bitchar += |
5217 | add_to_class(classbits, &class_uchardata, options, cd, c, d); |
5218 | |
5219 | continue; /* Go get the next char in the class */ |
5220 | } |
5221 | |
5222 | /* Handle a single character - we can get here for a normal non-escape |
5223 | char, or after \ that introduces a single character or for an apparent |
5224 | range that isn't. Only the value 1 matters for class_one_char, so don't |
5225 | increase it if it is already 2 or more ... just in case there's a class |
5226 | with a zillion characters in it. */ |
5227 | |
5228 | CLASS_SINGLE_CHARACTER: |
5229 | if (class_one_char < 2) class_one_char++; |
5230 | |
5231 | /* If class_one_char is 1, we have the first single character in the |
5232 | class, and there have been no prior ranges, or XCLASS items generated by |
5233 | escapes. If this is the final character in the class, we can optimize by |
5234 | turning the item into a 1-character OP_CHAR[I] if it's positive, or |
5235 | OP_NOT[I] if it's negative. In the positive case, it can cause firstchar |
5236 | to be set. Otherwise, there can be no first char if this item is first, |
5237 | whatever repeat count may follow. In the case of reqchar, save the |
5238 | previous value for reinstating. */ |
5239 | |
5240 | if (class_one_char == 1 && ptr[1] == CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET) |
5241 | { |
5242 | ptr++; |
5243 | zeroreqchar = reqchar; |
5244 | zeroreqcharflags = reqcharflags; |
5245 | |
5246 | if (negate_class) |
5247 | { |
5248 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
5249 | int d; |
5250 | #endif |
5251 | if (firstcharflags == REQ_UNSET) firstcharflags = REQ_NONE; |
5252 | zerofirstchar = firstchar; |
5253 | zerofirstcharflags = firstcharflags; |
5254 | |
5255 | /* For caseless UTF-8 mode when UCP support is available, check |
5256 | whether this character has more than one other case. If so, generate |
5257 | a special OP_NOTPROP item instead of OP_NOTI. */ |
5258 | |
5259 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
5260 | if (utf && (options & PCRE_CASELESS) != 0 && |
5261 | (d = UCD_CASESET(c)) != 0) |
5262 | { |
5263 | *code++ = OP_NOTPROP; |
5264 | *code++ = PT_CLIST; |
5265 | *code++ = d; |
5266 | } |
5267 | else |
5268 | #endif |
5269 | /* Char has only one other case, or UCP not available */ |
5270 | |
5271 | { |
5272 | *code++ = ((options & PCRE_CASELESS) != 0)? OP_NOTI: OP_NOT; |
5273 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
5274 | if (utf && c > MAX_VALUE_FOR_SINGLE_CHAR) |
5275 | code += PRIV(ord2utf)(c, code); |
5276 | else |
5277 | #endif |
5278 | *code++ = c; |
5279 | } |
5280 | |
5281 | /* We are finished with this character class */ |
5282 | |
5283 | goto END_CLASS; |
5284 | } |
5285 | |
5286 | /* For a single, positive character, get the value into mcbuffer, and |
5287 | then we can handle this with the normal one-character code. */ |
5288 | |
5289 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
5290 | if (utf && c > MAX_VALUE_FOR_SINGLE_CHAR) |
5291 | mclength = PRIV(ord2utf)(c, mcbuffer); |
5292 | else |
5293 | #endif |
5294 | { |
5295 | mcbuffer[0] = c; |
5296 | mclength = 1; |
5297 | } |
5298 | goto ONE_CHAR; |
5299 | } /* End of 1-char optimization */ |
5300 | |
5301 | /* There is more than one character in the class, or an XCLASS item |
5302 | has been generated. Add this character to the class. */ |
5303 | |
5304 | class_has_8bitchar += |
5305 | add_to_class(classbits, &class_uchardata, options, cd, c, c); |
5306 | } |
5307 | |
5308 | /* Loop until ']' reached. This "while" is the end of the "do" far above. |
5309 | If we are at the end of an internal nested string, revert to the outer |
5310 | string. */ |
5311 | |
5312 | while (((c = *(++ptr)) != CHAR_NULL || |
5313 | (nestptr != NULL && |
5314 | (ptr = nestptr, nestptr = NULL, c = *(++ptr)) != CHAR_NULL)) && |
5315 | (c != CHAR_RIGHT_SQUARE_BRACKET || inescq)); |
5316 | |
5317 | /* Check for missing terminating ']' */ |
5318 | |
5319 | if (c == CHAR_NULL) |
5320 | { |
5321 | *errorcodeptr = ERR6; |
5322 | goto FAILED; |
5323 | } |
5324 | |
5325 | /* We will need an XCLASS if data has been placed in class_uchardata. In |
5326 | the second phase this is a sufficient test. However, in the pre-compile |
5327 | phase, class_uchardata gets emptied to prevent workspace overflow, so it |
5328 | only if the very last character in the class needs XCLASS will it contain |
5329 | anything at this point. For this reason, xclass gets set TRUE above when |
5330 | uchar_classdata is emptied, and that's why this code is the way it is here |
5331 | instead of just doing a test on class_uchardata below. */ |
5332 | |
5333 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
5334 | if (class_uchardata > class_uchardata_base) xclass = TRUE; |
5335 | #endif |
5336 | |
5337 | /* If this is the first thing in the branch, there can be no first char |
5338 | setting, whatever the repeat count. Any reqchar setting must remain |
5339 | unchanged after any kind of repeat. */ |
5340 | |
5341 | if (firstcharflags == REQ_UNSET) firstcharflags = REQ_NONE; |
5342 | zerofirstchar = firstchar; |
5343 | zerofirstcharflags = firstcharflags; |
5344 | zeroreqchar = reqchar; |
5345 | zeroreqcharflags = reqcharflags; |
5346 | |
5347 | /* If there are characters with values > 255, we have to compile an |
5348 | extended class, with its own opcode, unless there was a negated special |
5349 | such as \S in the class, and PCRE_UCP is not set, because in that case all |
5350 | characters > 255 are in the class, so any that were explicitly given as |
5351 | well can be ignored. If (when there are explicit characters > 255 that must |
5352 | be listed) there are no characters < 256, we can omit the bitmap in the |
5353 | actual compiled code. */ |
5354 | |
5355 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
5356 | if (xclass && (!should_flip_negation || (options & PCRE_UCP) != 0)) |
5357 | #elif !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
5358 | if (xclass && !should_flip_negation) |
5359 | #endif |
5360 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
5361 | { |
5362 | *class_uchardata++ = XCL_END; /* Marks the end of extra data */ |
5363 | *code++ = OP_XCLASS; |
5364 | code += LINK_SIZE; |
5365 | *code = negate_class? XCL_NOT:0; |
5366 | |
5367 | /* If the map is required, move up the extra data to make room for it; |
5368 | otherwise just move the code pointer to the end of the extra data. */ |
5369 | |
5370 | if (class_has_8bitchar > 0) |
5371 | { |
5372 | *code++ |= XCL_MAP; |
5373 | memmove(code + (32 / sizeof(pcre_uchar)), code, |
5374 | IN_UCHARS(class_uchardata - code)); |
5375 | memcpy(code, classbits, 32); |
5376 | code = class_uchardata + (32 / sizeof(pcre_uchar)); |
5377 | } |
5378 | else code = class_uchardata; |
5379 | |
5380 | /* Now fill in the complete length of the item */ |
5381 | |
5382 | PUT(previous, 1, (int)(code - previous)); |
5383 | break; /* End of class handling */ |
5384 | } |
5385 | #endif |
5386 | |
5387 | /* If there are no characters > 255, or they are all to be included or |
5388 | excluded, set the opcode to OP_CLASS or OP_NCLASS, depending on whether the |
5389 | whole class was negated and whether there were negative specials such as \S |
5390 | (non-UCP) in the class. Then copy the 32-byte map into the code vector, |
5391 | negating it if necessary. */ |
5392 | |
5393 | *code++ = (negate_class == should_flip_negation) ? OP_CLASS : OP_NCLASS; |
5394 | if (lengthptr == NULL) /* Save time in the pre-compile phase */ |
5395 | { |
5396 | if (negate_class) |
5397 | for (c = 0; c < 32; c++) classbits[c] = ~classbits[c]; |
5398 | memcpy(code, classbits, 32); |
5399 | } |
5400 | code += 32 / sizeof(pcre_uchar); |
5401 | |
5402 | END_CLASS: |
5403 | break; |
5404 | |
5405 | |
5406 | /* ===================================================================*/ |
5407 | /* Various kinds of repeat; '{' is not necessarily a quantifier, but this |
5408 | has been tested above. */ |
5409 | |
5410 | case CHAR_LEFT_CURLY_BRACKET: |
5411 | if (!is_quantifier) goto NORMAL_CHAR; |
5412 | ptr = read_repeat_counts(ptr+1, &repeat_min, &repeat_max, errorcodeptr); |
5413 | if (*errorcodeptr != 0) goto FAILED; |
5414 | goto REPEAT; |
5415 | |
5416 | case CHAR_ASTERISK: |
5417 | repeat_min = 0; |
5418 | repeat_max = -1; |
5419 | goto REPEAT; |
5420 | |
5421 | case CHAR_PLUS: |
5422 | repeat_min = 1; |
5423 | repeat_max = -1; |
5424 | goto REPEAT; |
5425 | |
5426 | case CHAR_QUESTION_MARK: |
5427 | repeat_min = 0; |
5428 | repeat_max = 1; |
5429 | |
5430 | REPEAT: |
5431 | if (previous == NULL) |
5432 | { |
5433 | *errorcodeptr = ERR9; |
5434 | goto FAILED; |
5435 | } |
5436 | |
5437 | if (repeat_min == 0) |
5438 | { |
5439 | firstchar = zerofirstchar; /* Adjust for zero repeat */ |
5440 | firstcharflags = zerofirstcharflags; |
5441 | reqchar = zeroreqchar; /* Ditto */ |
5442 | reqcharflags = zeroreqcharflags; |
5443 | } |
5444 | |
5445 | /* Remember whether this is a variable length repeat */ |
5446 | |
5447 | reqvary = (repeat_min == repeat_max)? 0 : REQ_VARY; |
5448 | |
5449 | op_type = 0; /* Default single-char op codes */ |
5450 | possessive_quantifier = FALSE; /* Default not possessive quantifier */ |
5451 | |
5452 | /* Save start of previous item, in case we have to move it up in order to |
5453 | insert something before it. */ |
5454 | |
5455 | tempcode = previous; |
5456 | |
5457 | /* Before checking for a possessive quantifier, we must skip over |
5458 | whitespace and comments in extended mode because Perl allows white space at |
5459 | this point. */ |
5460 | |
5461 | if ((options & PCRE_EXTENDED) != 0) |
5462 | { |
5463 | const pcre_uchar *p = ptr + 1; |
5464 | for (;;) |
5465 | { |
5466 | while (MAX_255(*p) && (cd->ctypes[*p] & ctype_space) != 0) p++; |
5467 | if (*p != CHAR_NUMBER_SIGN) break; |
5468 | p++; |
5469 | while (*p != CHAR_NULL) |
5470 | { |
5471 | if (IS_NEWLINE(p)) /* For non-fixed-length newline cases, */ |
5472 | { /* IS_NEWLINE sets cd->nllen. */ |
5473 | p += cd->nllen; |
5474 | break; |
5475 | } |
5476 | p++; |
5477 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
5478 | if (utf) FORWARDCHAR(p); |
5479 | #endif |
5480 | } /* Loop for comment characters */ |
5481 | } /* Loop for multiple comments */ |
5482 | ptr = p - 1; /* Character before the next significant one. */ |
5483 | } |
5484 | |
5485 | /* If the next character is '+', we have a possessive quantifier. This |
5486 | implies greediness, whatever the setting of the PCRE_UNGREEDY option. |
5487 | If the next character is '?' this is a minimizing repeat, by default, |
5488 | but if PCRE_UNGREEDY is set, it works the other way round. We change the |
5489 | repeat type to the non-default. */ |
5490 | |
5491 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_PLUS) |
5492 | { |
5493 | repeat_type = 0; /* Force greedy */ |
5494 | possessive_quantifier = TRUE; |
5495 | ptr++; |
5496 | } |
5497 | else if (ptr[1] == CHAR_QUESTION_MARK) |
5498 | { |
5499 | repeat_type = greedy_non_default; |
5500 | ptr++; |
5501 | } |
5502 | else repeat_type = greedy_default; |
5503 | |
5504 | /* If previous was a recursion call, wrap it in atomic brackets so that |
5505 | previous becomes the atomic group. All recursions were so wrapped in the |
5506 | past, but it no longer happens for non-repeated recursions. In fact, the |
5507 | repeated ones could be re-implemented independently so as not to need this, |
5508 | but for the moment we rely on the code for repeating groups. */ |
5509 | |
5510 | if (*previous == OP_RECURSE) |
5511 | { |
5512 | memmove(previous + 1 + LINK_SIZE, previous, IN_UCHARS(1 + LINK_SIZE)); |
5513 | *previous = OP_ONCE; |
5514 | PUT(previous, 1, 2 + 2*LINK_SIZE); |
5515 | previous[2 + 2*LINK_SIZE] = OP_KET; |
5516 | PUT(previous, 3 + 2*LINK_SIZE, 2 + 2*LINK_SIZE); |
5517 | code += 2 + 2 * LINK_SIZE; |
5518 | length_prevgroup = 3 + 3*LINK_SIZE; |
5519 | |
5520 | /* When actually compiling, we need to check whether this was a forward |
5521 | reference, and if so, adjust the offset. */ |
5522 | |
5523 | if (lengthptr == NULL && cd->hwm >= cd->start_workspace + LINK_SIZE) |
5524 | { |
5525 | int offset = GET(cd->hwm, -LINK_SIZE); |
5526 | if (offset == previous + 1 - cd->start_code) |
5527 | PUT(cd->hwm, -LINK_SIZE, offset + 1 + LINK_SIZE); |
5528 | } |
5529 | } |
5530 | |
5531 | /* Now handle repetition for the different types of item. */ |
5532 | |
5533 | /* If previous was a character or negated character match, abolish the item |
5534 | and generate a repeat item instead. If a char item has a minimum of more |
5535 | than one, ensure that it is set in reqchar - it might not be if a sequence |
5536 | such as x{3} is the first thing in a branch because the x will have gone |
5537 | into firstchar instead. */ |
5538 | |
5539 | if (*previous == OP_CHAR || *previous == OP_CHARI |
5540 | || *previous == OP_NOT || *previous == OP_NOTI) |
5541 | { |
5542 | switch (*previous) |
5543 | { |
5544 | default: /* Make compiler happy. */ |
5545 | case OP_CHAR: op_type = OP_STAR - OP_STAR; break; |
5546 | case OP_CHARI: op_type = OP_STARI - OP_STAR; break; |
5547 | case OP_NOT: op_type = OP_NOTSTAR - OP_STAR; break; |
5548 | case OP_NOTI: op_type = OP_NOTSTARI - OP_STAR; break; |
5549 | } |
5550 | |
5551 | /* Deal with UTF characters that take up more than one character. It's |
5552 | easier to write this out separately than try to macrify it. Use c to |
5553 | hold the length of the character in bytes, plus UTF_LENGTH to flag that |
5554 | it's a length rather than a small character. */ |
5555 | |
5556 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
5557 | if (utf && NOT_FIRSTCHAR(code[-1])) |
5558 | { |
5559 | pcre_uchar *lastchar = code - 1; |
5560 | BACKCHAR(lastchar); |
5561 | c = (int)(code - lastchar); /* Length of UTF-8 character */ |
5562 | memcpy(utf_chars, lastchar, IN_UCHARS(c)); /* Save the char */ |
5563 | c |= UTF_LENGTH; /* Flag c as a length */ |
5564 | } |
5565 | else |
5566 | #endif /* SUPPORT_UTF */ |
5567 | |
5568 | /* Handle the case of a single charater - either with no UTF support, or |
5569 | with UTF disabled, or for a single character UTF character. */ |
5570 | { |
5571 | c = code[-1]; |
5572 | if (*previous <= OP_CHARI && repeat_min > 1) |
5573 | { |
5574 | reqchar = c; |
5575 | reqcharflags = req_caseopt | cd->req_varyopt; |
5576 | } |
5577 | } |
5578 | |
5579 | goto OUTPUT_SINGLE_REPEAT; /* Code shared with single character types */ |
5580 | } |
5581 | |
5582 | /* If previous was a character type match (\d or similar), abolish it and |
5583 | create a suitable repeat item. The code is shared with single-character |
5584 | repeats by setting op_type to add a suitable offset into repeat_type. Note |
5585 | the the Unicode property types will be present only when SUPPORT_UCP is |
5586 | defined, but we don't wrap the little bits of code here because it just |
5587 | makes it horribly messy. */ |
5588 | |
5589 | else if (*previous < OP_EODN) |
5590 | { |
5591 | pcre_uchar *oldcode; |
5592 | int prop_type, prop_value; |
5593 | op_type = OP_TYPESTAR - OP_STAR; /* Use type opcodes */ |
5594 | c = *previous; |
5595 | |
5596 | OUTPUT_SINGLE_REPEAT: |
5597 | if (*previous == OP_PROP || *previous == OP_NOTPROP) |
5598 | { |
5599 | prop_type = previous[1]; |
5600 | prop_value = previous[2]; |
5601 | } |
5602 | else prop_type = prop_value = -1; |
5603 | |
5604 | oldcode = code; |
5605 | code = previous; /* Usually overwrite previous item */ |
5606 | |
5607 | /* If the maximum is zero then the minimum must also be zero; Perl allows |
5608 | this case, so we do too - by simply omitting the item altogether. */ |
5609 | |
5610 | if (repeat_max == 0) goto END_REPEAT; |
5611 | |
5612 | /* Combine the op_type with the repeat_type */ |
5613 | |
5614 | repeat_type += op_type; |
5615 | |
5616 | /* A minimum of zero is handled either as the special case * or ?, or as |
5617 | an UPTO, with the maximum given. */ |
5618 | |
5619 | if (repeat_min == 0) |
5620 | { |
5621 | if (repeat_max == -1) *code++ = OP_STAR + repeat_type; |
5622 | else if (repeat_max == 1) *code++ = OP_QUERY + repeat_type; |
5623 | else |
5624 | { |
5625 | *code++ = OP_UPTO + repeat_type; |
5626 | PUT2INC(code, 0, repeat_max); |
5627 | } |
5628 | } |
5629 | |
5630 | /* A repeat minimum of 1 is optimized into some special cases. If the |
5631 | maximum is unlimited, we use OP_PLUS. Otherwise, the original item is |
5632 | left in place and, if the maximum is greater than 1, we use OP_UPTO with |
5633 | one less than the maximum. */ |
5634 | |
5635 | else if (repeat_min == 1) |
5636 | { |
5637 | if (repeat_max == -1) |
5638 | *code++ = OP_PLUS + repeat_type; |
5639 | else |
5640 | { |
5641 | code = oldcode; /* leave previous item in place */ |
5642 | if (repeat_max == 1) goto END_REPEAT; |
5643 | *code++ = OP_UPTO + repeat_type; |
5644 | PUT2INC(code, 0, repeat_max - 1); |
5645 | } |
5646 | } |
5647 | |
5648 | /* The case {n,n} is just an EXACT, while the general case {n,m} is |
5649 | handled as an EXACT followed by an UPTO. */ |
5650 | |
5651 | else |
5652 | { |
5653 | *code++ = OP_EXACT + op_type; /* NB EXACT doesn't have repeat_type */ |
5654 | PUT2INC(code, 0, repeat_min); |
5655 | |
5656 | /* If the maximum is unlimited, insert an OP_STAR. Before doing so, |
5657 | we have to insert the character for the previous code. For a repeated |
5658 | Unicode property match, there are two extra bytes that define the |
5659 | required property. In UTF-8 mode, long characters have their length in |
5660 | c, with the UTF_LENGTH bit as a flag. */ |
5661 | |
5662 | if (repeat_max < 0) |
5663 | { |
5664 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
5665 | if (utf && (c & UTF_LENGTH) != 0) |
5666 | { |
5667 | memcpy(code, utf_chars, IN_UCHARS(c & 7)); |
5668 | code += c & 7; |
5669 | } |
5670 | else |
5671 | #endif |
5672 | { |
5673 | *code++ = c; |
5674 | if (prop_type >= 0) |
5675 | { |
5676 | *code++ = prop_type; |
5677 | *code++ = prop_value; |
5678 | } |
5679 | } |
5680 | *code++ = OP_STAR + repeat_type; |
5681 | } |
5682 | |
5683 | /* Else insert an UPTO if the max is greater than the min, again |
5684 | preceded by the character, for the previously inserted code. If the |
5685 | UPTO is just for 1 instance, we can use QUERY instead. */ |
5686 | |
5687 | else if (repeat_max != repeat_min) |
5688 | { |
5689 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
5690 | if (utf && (c & UTF_LENGTH) != 0) |
5691 | { |
5692 | memcpy(code, utf_chars, IN_UCHARS(c & 7)); |
5693 | code += c & 7; |
5694 | } |
5695 | else |
5696 | #endif |
5697 | *code++ = c; |
5698 | if (prop_type >= 0) |
5699 | { |
5700 | *code++ = prop_type; |
5701 | *code++ = prop_value; |
5702 | } |
5703 | repeat_max -= repeat_min; |
5704 | |
5705 | if (repeat_max == 1) |
5706 | { |
5707 | *code++ = OP_QUERY + repeat_type; |
5708 | } |
5709 | else |
5710 | { |
5711 | *code++ = OP_UPTO + repeat_type; |
5712 | PUT2INC(code, 0, repeat_max); |
5713 | } |
5714 | } |
5715 | } |
5716 | |
5717 | /* The character or character type itself comes last in all cases. */ |
5718 | |
5719 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF && !defined COMPILE_PCRE32 |
5720 | if (utf && (c & UTF_LENGTH) != 0) |
5721 | { |
5722 | memcpy(code, utf_chars, IN_UCHARS(c & 7)); |
5723 | code += c & 7; |
5724 | } |
5725 | else |
5726 | #endif |
5727 | *code++ = c; |
5728 | |
5729 | /* For a repeated Unicode property match, there are two extra bytes that |
5730 | define the required property. */ |
5731 | |
5732 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UCP |
5733 | if (prop_type >= 0) |
5734 | { |
5735 | *code++ = prop_type; |
5736 | *code++ = prop_value; |
5737 | } |
5738 | #endif |
5739 | } |
5740 | |
5741 | /* If previous was a character class or a back reference, we put the repeat |
5742 | stuff after it, but just skip the item if the repeat was {0,0}. */ |
5743 | |
5744 | else if (*previous == OP_CLASS || *previous == OP_NCLASS || |
5745 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
5746 | *previous == OP_XCLASS || |
5747 | #endif |
5748 | *previous == OP_REF || *previous == OP_REFI || |
5749 | *previous == OP_DNREF || *previous == OP_DNREFI) |
5750 | { |
5751 | if (repeat_max == 0) |
5752 | { |
5753 | code = previous; |
5754 | goto END_REPEAT; |
5755 | } |
5756 | |
5757 | if (repeat_min == 0 && repeat_max == -1) |
5758 | *code++ = OP_CRSTAR + repeat_type; |
5759 | else if (repeat_min == 1 && repeat_max == -1) |
5760 | *code++ = OP_CRPLUS + repeat_type; |
5761 | else if (repeat_min == 0 && repeat_max == 1) |
5762 | *code++ = OP_CRQUERY + repeat_type; |
5763 | else |
5764 | { |
5765 | *code++ = OP_CRRANGE + repeat_type; |
5766 | PUT2INC(code, 0, repeat_min); |
5767 | if (repeat_max == -1) repeat_max = 0; /* 2-byte encoding for max */ |
5768 | PUT2INC(code, 0, repeat_max); |
5769 | } |
5770 | } |
5771 | |
5772 | /* If previous was a bracket group, we may have to replicate it in certain |
5773 | cases. Note that at this point we can encounter only the "basic" bracket |
5774 | opcodes such as BRA and CBRA, as this is the place where they get converted |
5775 | into the more special varieties such as BRAPOS and SBRA. A test for >= |
5776 | OP_ASSERT and <= OP_COND includes ASSERT, ASSERT_NOT, ASSERTBACK, |
5777 | ASSERTBACK_NOT, ONCE, ONCE_NC, BRA, BRAPOS, CBRA, CBRAPOS, and COND. |
5778 | Originally, PCRE did not allow repetition of assertions, but now it does, |
5779 | for Perl compatibility. */ |
5780 | |
5781 | else if (*previous >= OP_ASSERT && *previous <= OP_COND) |
5782 | { |
5783 | register int i; |
5784 | int len = (int)(code - previous); |
5785 | pcre_uchar *bralink = NULL; |
5786 | pcre_uchar *brazeroptr = NULL; |
5787 | |
5788 | /* Repeating a DEFINE group is pointless, but Perl allows the syntax, so |
5789 | we just ignore the repeat. */ |
5790 | |
5791 | if (*previous == OP_COND && previous[LINK_SIZE+1] == OP_DEF) |
5792 | goto END_REPEAT; |
5793 | |
5794 | /* There is no sense in actually repeating assertions. The only potential |
5795 | use of repetition is in cases when the assertion is optional. Therefore, |
5796 | if the minimum is greater than zero, just ignore the repeat. If the |
5797 | maximum is not zero or one, set it to 1. */ |
5798 | |
5799 | if (*previous < OP_ONCE) /* Assertion */ |
5800 | { |
5801 | if (repeat_min > 0) goto END_REPEAT; |
5802 | if (repeat_max < 0 || repeat_max > 1) repeat_max = 1; |
5803 | } |
5804 | |
5805 | /* The case of a zero minimum is special because of the need to stick |
5806 | OP_BRAZERO in front of it, and because the group appears once in the |
5807 | data, whereas in other cases it appears the minimum number of times. For |
5808 | this reason, it is simplest to treat this case separately, as otherwise |
5809 | the code gets far too messy. There are several special subcases when the |
5810 | minimum is zero. */ |
5811 | |
5812 | if (repeat_min == 0) |
5813 | { |
5814 | /* If the maximum is also zero, we used to just omit the group from the |
5815 | output altogether, like this: |
5816 | |
5817 | ** if (repeat_max == 0) |
5818 | ** { |
5819 | ** code = previous; |
5820 | ** goto END_REPEAT; |
5821 | ** } |
5822 | |
5823 | However, that fails when a group or a subgroup within it is referenced |
5824 | as a subroutine from elsewhere in the pattern, so now we stick in |
5825 | OP_SKIPZERO in front of it so that it is skipped on execution. As we |
5826 | don't have a list of which groups are referenced, we cannot do this |
5827 | selectively. |
5828 | |
5829 | If the maximum is 1 or unlimited, we just have to stick in the BRAZERO |
5830 | and do no more at this point. However, we do need to adjust any |
5831 | OP_RECURSE calls inside the group that refer to the group itself or any |
5832 | internal or forward referenced group, because the offset is from the |
5833 | start of the whole regex. Temporarily terminate the pattern while doing |
5834 | this. */ |
5835 | |
5836 | if (repeat_max <= 1) /* Covers 0, 1, and unlimited */ |
5837 | { |
5838 | *code = OP_END; |
5839 | adjust_recurse(previous, 1, utf, cd, save_hwm); |
5840 | memmove(previous + 1, previous, IN_UCHARS(len)); |
5841 | code++; |
5842 | if (repeat_max == 0) |
5843 | { |
5844 | *previous++ = OP_SKIPZERO; |
5845 | goto END_REPEAT; |
5846 | } |
5847 | brazeroptr = previous; /* Save for possessive optimizing */ |
5848 | *previous++ = OP_BRAZERO + repeat_type; |
5849 | } |
5850 | |
5851 | /* If the maximum is greater than 1 and limited, we have to replicate |
5852 | in a nested fashion, sticking OP_BRAZERO before each set of brackets. |
5853 | The first one has to be handled carefully because it's the original |
5854 | copy, which has to be moved up. The remainder can be handled by code |
5855 | that is common with the non-zero minimum case below. We have to |
5856 | adjust the value or repeat_max, since one less copy is required. Once |
5857 | again, we may have to adjust any OP_RECURSE calls inside the group. */ |
5858 | |
5859 | else |
5860 | { |
5861 | int offset; |
5862 | *code = OP_END; |
5863 | adjust_recurse(previous, 2 + LINK_SIZE, utf, cd, save_hwm); |
5864 | memmove(previous + 2 + LINK_SIZE, previous, IN_UCHARS(len)); |
5865 | code += 2 + LINK_SIZE; |
5866 | *previous++ = OP_BRAZERO + repeat_type; |
5867 | *previous++ = OP_BRA; |
5868 | |
5869 | /* We chain together the bracket offset fields that have to be |
5870 | filled in later when the ends of the brackets are reached. */ |
5871 | |
5872 | offset = (bralink == NULL)? 0 : (int)(previous - bralink); |
5873 | bralink = previous; |
5874 | PUTINC(previous, 0, offset); |
5875 | } |
5876 | |
5877 | repeat_max--; |
5878 | } |
5879 | |
5880 | /* If the minimum is greater than zero, replicate the group as many |
5881 | times as necessary, and adjust the maximum to the number of subsequent |
5882 | copies that we need. If we set a first char from the group, and didn't |
5883 | set a required char, copy the latter from the former. If there are any |
5884 | forward reference subroutine calls in the group, there will be entries on |
5885 | the workspace list; replicate these with an appropriate increment. */ |
5886 | |
5887 | else |
5888 | { |
5889 | if (repeat_min > 1) |
5890 | { |
5891 | /* In the pre-compile phase, we don't actually do the replication. We |
5892 | just adjust the length as if we had. Do some paranoid checks for |
5893 | potential integer overflow. The INT64_OR_DOUBLE type is a 64-bit |
5894 | integer type when available, otherwise double. */ |
5895 | |
5896 | if (lengthptr != NULL) |
5897 | { |
5898 | int delta = (repeat_min - 1)*length_prevgroup; |
5899 | if ((INT64_OR_DOUBLE)(repeat_min - 1)* |
5900 | (INT64_OR_DOUBLE)length_prevgroup > |
5901 | (INT64_OR_DOUBLE)INT_MAX || |
5902 | OFLOW_MAX - *lengthptr < delta) |
5903 | { |
5904 | *errorcodeptr = ERR20; |
5905 | goto FAILED; |
5906 | } |
5907 | *lengthptr += delta; |
5908 | } |
5909 | |
5910 | /* This is compiling for real. If there is a set first byte for |
5911 | the group, and we have not yet set a "required byte", set it. Make |
5912 | sure there is enough workspace for copying forward references before |
5913 | doing the copy. */ |
5914 | |
5915 | else |
5916 | { |
5917 | if (groupsetfirstchar && reqcharflags < 0) |
5918 | { |
5919 | reqchar = firstchar; |
5920 | reqcharflags = firstcharflags; |
5921 | } |
5922 | |
5923 | for (i = 1; i < repeat_min; i++) |
5924 | { |
5925 | pcre_uchar *hc; |
5926 | pcre_uchar *this_hwm = cd->hwm; |
5927 | memcpy(code, previous, IN_UCHARS(len)); |
5928 | |
5929 | while (cd->hwm > cd->start_workspace + cd->workspace_size - |
5930 | WORK_SIZE_SAFETY_MARGIN - (this_hwm - save_hwm)) |
5931 | { |
5932 | int save_offset = save_hwm - cd->start_workspace; |
5933 | int this_offset = this_hwm - cd->start_workspace; |
5934 | *errorcodeptr = expand_workspace(cd); |
5935 | if (*errorcodeptr != 0) goto FAILED; |
5936 | save_hwm = (pcre_uchar *)cd->start_workspace + save_offset; |
5937 | this_hwm = (pcre_uchar *)cd->start_workspace + this_offset; |
5938 | } |
5939 | |
5940 | for (hc = save_hwm; hc < this_hwm; hc += LINK_SIZE) |
5941 | { |
5942 | PUT(cd->hwm, 0, GET(hc, 0) + len); |
5943 | cd->hwm += LINK_SIZE; |
5944 | } |
5945 | save_hwm = this_hwm; |
5946 | code += len; |
5947 | } |
5948 | } |
5949 | } |
5950 | |
5951 | if (repeat_max > 0) repeat_max -= repeat_min; |
5952 | } |
5953 | |
5954 | /* This code is common to both the zero and non-zero minimum cases. If |
5955 | the maximum is limited, it replicates the group in a nested fashion, |
5956 | remembering the bracket starts on a stack. In the case of a zero minimum, |
5957 | the first one was set up above. In all cases the repeat_max now specifies |
5958 | the number of additional copies needed. Again, we must remember to |
5959 | replicate entries on the forward reference list. */ |
5960 | |
5961 | if (repeat_max >= 0) |
5962 | { |
5963 | /* In the pre-compile phase, we don't actually do the replication. We |
5964 | just adjust the length as if we had. For each repetition we must add 1 |
5965 | to the length for BRAZERO and for all but the last repetition we must |
5966 | add 2 + 2*LINKSIZE to allow for the nesting that occurs. Do some |
5967 | paranoid checks to avoid integer overflow. The INT64_OR_DOUBLE type is |
5968 | a 64-bit integer type when available, otherwise double. */ |
5969 | |
5970 | if (lengthptr != NULL && repeat_max > 0) |
5971 | { |
5972 | int delta = repeat_max * (length_prevgroup + 1 + 2 + 2*LINK_SIZE) - |
5973 | 2 - 2*LINK_SIZE; /* Last one doesn't nest */ |
5974 | if ((INT64_OR_DOUBLE)repeat_max * |
5975 | (INT64_OR_DOUBLE)(length_prevgroup + 1 + 2 + 2*LINK_SIZE) |
5976 | > (INT64_OR_DOUBLE)INT_MAX || |
5977 | OFLOW_MAX - *lengthptr < delta) |
5978 | { |
5979 | *errorcodeptr = ERR20; |
5980 | goto FAILED; |
5981 | } |
5982 | *lengthptr += delta; |
5983 | } |
5984 | |
5985 | /* This is compiling for real */ |
5986 | |
5987 | else for (i = repeat_max - 1; i >= 0; i--) |
5988 | { |
5989 | pcre_uchar *hc; |
5990 | pcre_uchar *this_hwm = cd->hwm; |
5991 | |
5992 | *code++ = OP_BRAZERO + repeat_type; |
5993 | |
5994 | /* All but the final copy start a new nesting, maintaining the |
5995 | chain of brackets outstanding. */ |
5996 | |
5997 | if (i != 0) |
5998 | { |
5999 | int offset; |
6000 | *code++ = OP_BRA; |
6001 | offset = (bralink == NULL)? 0 : (int)(code - bralink); |
6002 | bralink = code; |
6003 | PUTINC(code, 0, offset); |
6004 | } |
6005 | |
6006 | memcpy(code, previous, IN_UCHARS(len)); |
6007 | |
6008 | /* Ensure there is enough workspace for forward references before |
6009 | copying them. */ |
6010 | |
6011 | while (cd->hwm > cd->start_workspace + cd->workspace_size - |
6012 | WORK_SIZE_SAFETY_MARGIN - (this_hwm - save_hwm)) |
6013 | { |
6014 | int save_offset = save_hwm - cd->start_workspace; |
6015 | int this_offset = this_hwm - cd->start_workspace; |
6016 | *errorcodeptr = expand_workspace(cd); |
6017 | if (*errorcodeptr != 0) goto FAILED; |
6018 | save_hwm = (pcre_uchar *)cd->start_workspace + save_offset; |
6019 | this_hwm = (pcre_uchar *)cd->start_workspace + this_offset; |
6020 | } |
6021 | |
6022 | for (hc = save_hwm; hc < this_hwm; hc += LINK_SIZE) |
6023 | { |
6024 | PUT(cd->hwm, 0, GET(hc, 0) + len + ((i != 0)? 2+LINK_SIZE : 1)); |
6025 | cd->hwm += LINK_SIZE; |
6026 | } |
6027 | save_hwm = this_hwm; |
6028 | code += len; |
6029 | } |
6030 | |
6031 | /* Now chain through the pending brackets, and fill in their length |
6032 | fields (which are holding the chain links pro tem). */ |
6033 | |
6034 | while (bralink != NULL) |
6035 | { |
6036 | int oldlinkoffset; |
6037 | int offset = (int)(code - bralink + 1); |
6038 | pcre_uchar *bra = code - offset; |
6039 | oldlinkoffset = GET(bra, 1); |
6040 | bralink = (oldlinkoffset == 0)? NULL : bralink - oldlinkoffset; |
6041 | *code++ = OP_KET; |
6042 | PUTINC(code, 0, offset); |
6043 | PUT(bra, 1, offset); |
6044 | } |
6045 | } |
6046 | |
6047 | /* If the maximum is unlimited, set a repeater in the final copy. For |
6048 | ONCE brackets, that's all we need to do. However, possessively repeated |
6049 | ONCE brackets can be converted into non-capturing brackets, as the |
6050 | behaviour of (?:xx)++ is the same as (?>xx)++ and this saves having to |
6051 | deal with possessive ONCEs specially. |
6052 | |
6053 | Otherwise, when we are doing the actual compile phase, check to see |
6054 | whether this group is one that could match an empty string. If so, |
6055 | convert the initial operator to the S form (e.g. OP_BRA -> OP_SBRA) so |
6056 | that runtime checking can be done. [This check is also applied to ONCE |
6057 | groups at runtime, but in a different way.] |
6058 | |
6059 | Then, if the quantifier was possessive and the bracket is not a |
6060 | conditional, we convert the BRA code to the POS form, and the KET code to |
6061 | KETRPOS. (It turns out to be convenient at runtime to detect this kind of |
6062 | subpattern at both the start and at the end.) The use of special opcodes |
6063 | makes it possible to reduce greatly the stack usage in pcre_exec(). If |
6064 | the group is preceded by OP_BRAZERO, convert this to OP_BRAPOSZERO. |
6065 | |
6066 | Then, if the minimum number of matches is 1 or 0, cancel the possessive |
6067 | flag so that the default action below, of wrapping everything inside |
6068 | atomic brackets, does not happen. When the minimum is greater than 1, |
6069 | there will be earlier copies of the group, and so we still have to wrap |
6070 | the whole thing. */ |
6071 | |
6072 | else |
6073 | { |
6074 | pcre_uchar *ketcode = code - 1 - LINK_SIZE; |
6075 | pcre_uchar *bracode = ketcode - GET(ketcode, 1); |
6076 | |
6077 | /* Convert possessive ONCE brackets to non-capturing */ |
6078 | |
6079 | if ((*bracode == OP_ONCE || *bracode == OP_ONCE_NC) && |
6080 | possessive_quantifier) *bracode = OP_BRA; |
6081 | |
6082 | /* For non-possessive ONCE brackets, all we need to do is to |
6083 | set the KET. */ |
6084 | |
6085 | if (*bracode == OP_ONCE || *bracode == OP_ONCE_NC) |
6086 | *ketcode = OP_KETRMAX + repeat_type; |
6087 | |
6088 | /* Handle non-ONCE brackets and possessive ONCEs (which have been |
6089 | converted to non-capturing above). */ |
6090 | |
6091 | else |
6092 | { |
6093 | /* In the compile phase, check for empty string matching. */ |
6094 | |
6095 | if (lengthptr == NULL) |
6096 | { |
6097 | pcre_uchar *scode = bracode; |
6098 | do |
6099 | { |
6100 | if (could_be_empty_branch(scode, ketcode, utf, cd, NULL)) |
6101 | { |
6102 | *bracode += OP_SBRA - OP_BRA; |
6103 | break; |
6104 | } |
6105 | scode += GET(scode, 1); |
6106 | } |
6107 | while (*scode == OP_ALT); |
6108 | } |
6109 | |
6110 | /* Handle possessive quantifiers. */ |
6111 | |
6112 | if (possessive_quantifier) |
6113 | { |
6114 | /* For COND brackets, we wrap the whole thing in a possessively |
6115 | repeated non-capturing bracket, because we have not invented POS |
6116 | versions of the COND opcodes. Because we are moving code along, we |
6117 | must ensure that any pending recursive references are updated. */ |
6118 | |
6119 | if (*bracode == OP_COND || *bracode == OP_SCOND) |
6120 | { |
6121 | int nlen = (int)(code - bracode); |
6122 | *code = OP_END; |
6123 | adjust_recurse(bracode, 1 + LINK_SIZE, utf, cd, save_hwm); |
6124 | memmove(bracode + 1 + LINK_SIZE, bracode, IN_UCHARS(nlen)); |
6125 | code += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
6126 | nlen += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
6127 | *bracode = OP_BRAPOS; |
6128 | *code++ = OP_KETRPOS; |
6129 | PUTINC(code, 0, nlen); |
6130 | PUT(bracode, 1, nlen); |
6131 | } |
6132 | |
6133 | /* For non-COND brackets, we modify the BRA code and use KETRPOS. */ |
6134 | |
6135 | else |
6136 | { |
6137 | *bracode += 1; /* Switch to xxxPOS opcodes */ |
6138 | *ketcode = OP_KETRPOS; |
6139 | } |
6140 | |
6141 | /* If the minimum is zero, mark it as possessive, then unset the |
6142 | possessive flag when the minimum is 0 or 1. */ |
6143 | |
6144 | if (brazeroptr != NULL) *brazeroptr = OP_BRAPOSZERO; |
6145 | if (repeat_min < 2) possessive_quantifier = FALSE; |
6146 | } |
6147 | |
6148 | /* Non-possessive quantifier */ |
6149 | |
6150 | else *ketcode = OP_KETRMAX + repeat_type; |
6151 | } |
6152 | } |
6153 | } |
6154 | |
6155 | /* If previous is OP_FAIL, it was generated by an empty class [] in |
6156 | JavaScript mode. The other ways in which OP_FAIL can be generated, that is |
6157 | by (*FAIL) or (?!) set previous to NULL, which gives a "nothing to repeat" |
6158 | error above. We can just ignore the repeat in JS case. */ |
6159 | |
6160 | else if (*previous == OP_FAIL) goto END_REPEAT; |
6161 | |
6162 | /* Else there's some kind of shambles */ |
6163 | |
6164 | else |
6165 | { |
6166 | *errorcodeptr = ERR11; |
6167 | goto FAILED; |
6168 | } |
6169 | |
6170 | /* If the character following a repeat is '+', possessive_quantifier is |
6171 | TRUE. For some opcodes, there are special alternative opcodes for this |
6172 | case. For anything else, we wrap the entire repeated item inside OP_ONCE |
6173 | brackets. Logically, the '+' notation is just syntactic sugar, taken from |
6174 | Sun's Java package, but the special opcodes can optimize it. |
6175 | |
6176 | Some (but not all) possessively repeated subpatterns have already been |
6177 | completely handled in the code just above. For them, possessive_quantifier |
6178 | is always FALSE at this stage. Note that the repeated item starts at |
6179 | tempcode, not at previous, which might be the first part of a string whose |
6180 | (former) last char we repeated. */ |
6181 | |
6182 | if (possessive_quantifier) |
6183 | { |
6184 | int len; |
6185 | |
6186 | /* Possessifying an EXACT quantifier has no effect, so we can ignore it. |
6187 | However, QUERY, STAR, or UPTO may follow (for quantifiers such as {5,6}, |
6188 | {5,}, or {5,10}). We skip over an EXACT item; if the length of what |
6189 | remains is greater than zero, there's a further opcode that can be |
6190 | handled. If not, do nothing, leaving the EXACT alone. */ |
6191 | |
6192 | switch(*tempcode) |
6193 | { |
6194 | case OP_TYPEEXACT: |
6195 | tempcode += PRIV(OP_lengths)[*tempcode] + |
6196 | ((tempcode[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_PROP |
6197 | || tempcode[1 + IMM2_SIZE] == OP_NOTPROP)? 2 : 0); |
6198 | break; |
6199 | |
6200 | /* CHAR opcodes are used for exacts whose count is 1. */ |
6201 | |
6202 | case OP_CHAR: |
6203 | case OP_CHARI: |
6204 | case OP_NOT: |
6205 | case OP_NOTI: |
6206 | case OP_EXACT: |
6207 | case OP_EXACTI: |
6208 | case OP_NOTEXACT: |
6209 | case OP_NOTEXACTI: |
6210 | tempcode += PRIV(OP_lengths)[*tempcode]; |
6211 | #ifdef SUPPORT_UTF |
6212 | if (utf && HAS_EXTRALEN(tempcode[-1])) |
6213 | tempcode += GET_EXTRALEN(tempcode[-1]); |
6214 | #endif |
6215 | break; |
6216 | |
6217 | /* For the class opcodes, the repeat operator appears at the end; |
6218 | adjust tempcode to point to it. */ |
6219 | |
6220 | case OP_CLASS: |
6221 | case OP_NCLASS: |
6222 | tempcode += 1 + 32/sizeof(pcre_uchar); |
6223 | break; |
6224 | |
6225 | #if defined SUPPORT_UTF || !defined COMPILE_PCRE8 |
6226 | case OP_XCLASS: |
6227 | tempcode += GET(tempcode, 1); |
6228 | break; |
6229 | #endif |
6230 | } |
6231 | |
6232 | /* If tempcode is equal to code (which points to the end of the repeated |
6233 | item), it means we have skipped an EXACT item but there is no following |
6234 | QUERY, STAR, or UPTO; the value of len will be 0, and we do nothing. In |
6235 | all other cases, tempcode will be pointing to the repeat opcode, and will |
6236 | be less than code, so the value of len will be greater than 0. */ |
6237 | |
6238 | len = (int)(code - tempcode); |
6239 | if (len > 0) |
6240 | { |
6241 | unsigned int repcode = *tempcode; |
6242 | |
6243 | /* There is a table for possessifying opcodes, all of which are less |
6244 | than OP_CALLOUT. A zero entry means there is no possessified version. |
6245 | */ |
6246 | |
6247 | if (repcode < OP_CALLOUT && opcode_possessify[repcode] > 0) |
6248 | *tempcode = opcode_possessify[repcode]; |
6249 | |
6250 | /* For opcode without a special possessified version, wrap the item in |
6251 | ONCE brackets. Because we are moving code along, we must ensure that any |
6252 | pending recursive references are updated. */ |
6253 | |
6254 | else |
6255 | { |
6256 | *code = OP_END; |
6257 | adjust_recurse(tempcode, 1 + LINK_SIZE, utf, cd, save_hwm); |
6258 | memmove(tempcode + 1 + LINK_SIZE, tempcode, IN_UCHARS(len)); |
6259 | code += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
6260 | len += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
6261 | tempcode[0] = OP_ONCE; |
6262 | *code++ = OP_KET; |
6263 | PUTINC(code, 0, len); |
6264 | PUT(tempcode, 1, len); |
6265 | } |
6266 | } |
6267 | |
6268 | #ifdef NEVER |
6269 | if (len > 0) switch (*tempcode) |
6270 | { |
6271 | case OP_STAR: *tempcode = OP_POSSTAR; break; |
6272 | case OP_PLUS: *tempcode = OP_POSPLUS; break; |
6273 | case OP_QUERY: *tempcode = OP_POSQUERY; break; |
6274 | case OP_UPTO: *tempcode = OP_POSUPTO; break; |
6275 | |
6276 | case OP_STARI: *tempcode = OP_POSSTARI; break; |
6277 | case OP_PLUSI: *tempcode = OP_POSPLUSI; break; |
6278 | case OP_QUERYI: *tempcode = OP_POSQUERYI; break; |
6279 | case OP_UPTOI: *tempcode = OP_POSUPTOI; break; |
6280 | |
6281 | case OP_NOTSTAR: *tempcode = OP_NOTPOSSTAR; break; |
6282 | case OP_NOTPLUS: *tempcode = OP_NOTPOSPLUS; break; |
6283 | case OP_NOTQUERY: *tempcode = OP_NOTPOSQUERY; break; |
6284 | case OP_NOTUPTO: *tempcode = OP_NOTPOSUPTO; break; |
6285 | |
6286 | case OP_NOTSTARI: *tempcode = OP_NOTPOSSTARI; break; |
6287 | case OP_NOTPLUSI: *tempcode = OP_NOTPOSPLUSI; break; |
6288 | case OP_NOTQUERYI: *tempcode = OP_NOTPOSQUERYI; break; |
6289 | case OP_NOTUPTOI: *tempcode = OP_NOTPOSUPTOI; break; |
6290 | |
6291 | case OP_TYPESTAR: *tempcode = OP_TYPEPOSSTAR; break; |
6292 | case OP_TYPEPLUS: *tempcode = OP_TYPEPOSPLUS; break; |
6293 | case OP_TYPEQUERY: *tempcode = OP_TYPEPOSQUERY; break; |
6294 | case OP_TYPEUPTO: *tempcode = OP_TYPEPOSUPTO; break; |
6295 | |
6296 | case OP_CRSTAR: *tempcode = OP_CRPOSSTAR; break; |
6297 | case OP_CRPLUS: *tempcode = OP_CRPOSPLUS; break; |
6298 | case OP_CRQUERY: *tempcode = OP_CRPOSQUERY; break; |
6299 | case OP_CRRANGE: *tempcode = OP_CRPOSRANGE; break; |
6300 | |
6301 | /* Because we are moving code along, we must ensure that any |
6302 | pending recursive references are updated. */ |
6303 | |
6304 | default: |
6305 | *code = OP_END; |
6306 | adjust_recurse(tempcode, 1 + LINK_SIZE, utf, cd, save_hwm); |
6307 | memmove(tempcode + 1 + LINK_SIZE, tempcode, IN_UCHARS(len)); |
6308 | code += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
6309 | len += 1 + LINK_SIZE; |
6310 | tempcode[0] = OP_ONCE; |
6311 | *code++ = OP_KET; |
6312 | PUTINC(code, 0, len); |
6313 | PUT(tempcode, 1, len); |
6314 | break; |
6315 | } |
6316 | #endif |
6317 | } |
6318 | |
6319 | /* In all case we no longer have a previous item. We also set the |
6320 | "follows varying string" flag for subsequently encountered reqchars if |
6321 | it isn't already set and we have just passed a varying length item. */ |
6322 | |
6323 | END_REPEAT: |
6324 | previous = NULL; |
6325 | cd->req_varyopt |= reqvary; |
6326 | break; |
6327 | |
6328 | |
6329 | /* ===================================================================*/ |
6330 | /* Start of nested parenthesized sub-expression, or comment or lookahead or |
6331 | lookbehind or option setting or condition or all the other extended |
6332 | parenthesis forms. */ |
6333 | |
6334 | case CHAR_LEFT_PARENTHESIS: |
6335 | newoptions = options; |
6336 | skipbytes = 0; |
6337 | bravalue = OP_CBRA; |
6338 | save_hwm = cd->hwm; |
6339 | reset_bracount = FALSE; |
6340 | |
6341 | /* First deal with various "verbs" that can be introduced by '*'. */ |
6342 | |
6343 | ptr++; |
6344 | if (ptr[0] == CHAR_ASTERISK && (ptr[1] == ':' |
6345 | || (MAX_255(ptr[1]) && ((cd->ctypes[ptr[1]] & ctype_letter) != 0)))) |
6346 | { |
6347 | int i, namelen; |
6348 | int arglen = 0; |
6349 | const char *vn = verbnames; |
6350 | const pcre_uchar *name = ptr + 1; |
6351 | const pcre_uchar *arg = NULL; |
6352 | previous = NULL; |
6353 | ptr++; |
6354 | while (MAX_255(*ptr) && (cd->ctypes[*ptr] & ctype_letter) != 0) ptr++; |
6355 | namelen = (int)(ptr - name); |
6356 | |
6357 | /* It appears that Perl allows any characters whatsoever, other than |
6358 | a closing parenthesis, to appear in arguments, so we no longer insist on |
6359 | letters, digits, and underscores. */ |
6360 | |
6361 | if (*ptr == CHAR_COLON) |
6362 | { |
6363 | arg = ++ptr; |
6364 | while (*ptr != CHAR_NULL && *ptr != CHAR_RIGHT_PARENTHESIS) ptr++; |
6365 | arglen = (int)(ptr - arg); |
6366 | if ((unsigned int)arglen > MAX_MARK) |
6367 | { |
6368 | *errorcodeptr = ERR75; |
6369 | goto FAILED; |
6370 | } |
6371 | } |
6372 | |
6373 | if (*ptr != CHAR_RIGHT_PARENTHESIS) |
6374 | { |
6375 | *errorcodeptr = ERR60; |
6376 | goto FAILED; |
6377 | } |
6378 | |
6379 | /* Scan the table of verb names */ |
6380 | |
6381 | for (i = 0; i < verbcount; i++) |
6382 | { |
6383 | if (namelen == verbs[i].len && |
6384 | STRNCMP_UC_C8(name, vn, namelen) == 0) |
6385 | { |
6386 | int setverb; |
6387 | |
6388 | /* Check for open captures before ACCEPT and convert it to |
6389 | ASSERT_ACCEPT if in an assertion. */ |
6390 | |
6391 | if (verbs[i].op == OP_ACCEPT) |
6392 | { |
6393 | open_capitem *oc; |
6394 | if (arglen != 0) |
6395 | { |
6396 | *errorcodeptr = ERR59; |
6397 | goto FAILED; |
6398 | } |
6399 | cd->had_accept = TRUE; |
6400 | for (oc = cd->open_caps; oc != NULL; oc = oc->next) |
6401 | { |
6402 | *code++ = OP_CLOSE; |
6403 | PUT2INC(code, 0, oc->number); |
6404 | } |
6405 | setverb = *code++ = |
6406 | (cd->assert_depth > 0)? OP_ASSERT_ACCEPT : OP_ACCEPT; |
6407 | |
6408 | /* Do not set firstchar after *ACCEPT */ |
6409 | if (firstcharflags == REQ_UNSET) firstcharflags = REQ_NONE; |
6410 | } |
6411 | |
6412 | /* Handle other cases with/without an argument */ |
6413 | |
6414 | else if (arglen == 0) |
6415 | { |
6416 | if (verbs[i].op < 0) /* Argument is mandatory */ |
6417 | { |
6418 | *errorcodeptr = ERR66; |
6419 | goto FAILED; |
6420 | } |
6421 | setverb = *code++ = verbs[i].op; |
6422 | } |
6423 | |
6424 | else |
6425 | { |
6426 | if (verbs[i].op_arg < 0) /* Argument is forbidden */ |
6427 | { |
6428 | *errorcodeptr = ERR59; |
6429 | goto FAILED; |
6430 | } |
6431 | setverb = *code++ = verbs[i].op_arg; |
6432 | *code++ = arglen; |
6433 | memcpy(code, arg, IN_UCHARS(arglen)); |
6434 | code += arglen; |
6435 | *code++ = 0; |
6436 | } |
6437 | |
6438 | switch (setverb) |
6439 | { |
6440 | case OP_THEN: |
6441 | case OP_THEN_ARG: |
6442 | cd->external_flags |= PCRE_HASTHEN; |
6443 | break; |
6444 | |
6445 | case OP_PRUNE: |
6446 | case OP_PRUNE_ARG: |
6447 | case OP_SKIP: |
6448 | case OP_SKIP_ARG: |
6449 | cd->had_pruneorskip = TRUE; |
6450 | break; |
6451 | } |
6452 | |
6453 | break; /* Found verb, exit loop */ |
6454 | } |
6455 | |
6456 | vn += verbs[i].len + 1; |
6457 | } |
6458 | |
6459 | if (i < verbcount) continue; /* Successfully handled a verb */ |
6460 | *errorcodeptr = ERR60; /* Verb not recognized */ |
6461 | goto FAILED; |
6462 | } |
6463 | |
6464 | /* Deal with the extended parentheses; all are introduced by '?', and the |
6465 | appearance of any of them means that this is not a capturing group. */ |
6466 | |
6467 | else if (*ptr == CHAR_QUESTION_MARK) |
6468 | { |
6469 | int i, set, unset, namelen; |
6470 | int *optset; |
6471 | const pcre_uchar *name; |
6472 | pcre_uchar *slot; |
6473 | |
6474 | switch (*(++ptr)) |
6475 | { |
6476 | case CHAR_NUMBER_SIGN: /* Comment; skip to ket */ |
6477 | ptr++; |
6478 | while (*ptr != CHAR_NULL && *ptr != CHAR_RIGHT_PARENTHESIS) ptr++; |
6479 | if (*ptr == CHAR_NULL) |
6480 | { |
6481 | *errorcodeptr = ERR18; |
6482 | goto FAILED; |
6483 | } |
6484 | continue; |
6485 | |
6486 | |
6487 | /* ------------------------------------------------------------ */ |
6488 | case CHAR_VERTICAL_LINE: /* Reset capture count for each branch */ |
6489 | reset_bracount = TRUE; |
6490 | /* Fall through */ |
6491 | |
6492 | /* ------------------------------------------------------------ */ |
6493 | case CHAR_COLON: /* Non-capturing bracket */ |
6494 | bravalue = OP_BRA; |
6495 | ptr++; |
6496 | break; |
6497 | |
6498 | |
6499 | /* ------------------------------------------------------------ */ |
6500 | case CHAR_LEFT_PARENTHESIS: |
6501 | bravalue = OP_COND; /* Conditional group */ |
6502 | tempptr = ptr; |
6503 | |
6504 | /* A condition can be an assertion, a number (referring to a numbered |
6505 | group's having been set), a name (referring to a named group), or 'R', |
6506 | referring to recursion. R<digits> and R&name are also permitted for |
6507 | recursion tests. |
6508 | |
6509 | There are ways of testing a named group: (?(name)) is used by Python; |
6510 | Perl 5.10 onwards uses (?(<name>) or (?('name')). |
6511 | |
6512 | There is one unfortunate ambiguity, caused by history. 'R' can be the |
6513 | recursive thing or the name 'R' (and similarly for 'R' followed by |
6514 | digits). We look for a name first; if not found, we try the other case. |
6515 | |
6516 | For compatibility with auto-callouts, we allow a callout to be |
6517 | specified before a condition that is an assertion. First, check for the |
6518 | syntax of a callout; if found, adjust the temporary pointer that is |
6519 | used to check for an assertion condition. That's all that is needed! */ |
6520 | |
6521 | if (ptr[1] == CHAR_QUESTION_MARK && ptr[2] == CHAR_C) |
6522 | { |
6523 | for (i = 3;; i++) if (!IS_DIGIT(ptr[i])) break; |
6524 | if (ptr[i] == CHAR_RIGHT_PARENTHESIS) |
6525 | tempptr += i + 1; |
6526 | } |
6527 | |
6528 | /* For conditions that are assertions, check the syntax, and then exit |
6529 | the switch. This will take control down to where bracketed groups, |
6530 | including assertions, are processed. */ |
6531 | |
6532 | if (tempptr[1] == CHAR_QUESTION_MARK && |
6533 | (tempptr[2] == CHAR_EQUALS_SIGN || |
6534 | tempptr[2] == CHAR_EXCLAMATION_MARK || |
6535 | tempptr[2] == CHAR_LESS_THAN_SIGN)) |
6536 | break; |
6537 | |
6538 | /* Other conditions use OP_CREF/OP_DNCREF/OP_RREF/OP_DNRREF, and all |
6539 | need to skip at least 1+IMM2_SIZE bytes at the start of the group. */ |
6540 | |
6541 | code[1+LINK_SIZE] = OP_CREF; |
6542 | skipbytes = 1+IMM2_SIZE; |
6543 | refsign = -1; |
6544 | |
6545 | /* Check for a test for recursion in a named group. */ |
6546 | |
6547 | ptr++; |
6548 | if (*ptr == CHAR_R && ptr[1] == CHAR_AMPERSAND) |
6549 | { |
6550 | terminator = -1; |
6551 | ptr += 2; |
6552 | code[1+LINK_SIZE] = OP_RREF; /* Change the type of test */ |
6553 | } |
6554 | |
6555 | /* Check for a test for a named group's having been set, using the Perl |
6556 | syntax (?(<name>) or (?('name'), and also allow for the original PCRE |
6557 | syntax of (?(name) or for (?(+n), (?(-n), and just (?(n). */ |
6558 | |
6559 | else if (*ptr == CHAR_LESS_THAN_SIGN) |
6560 | { |
6561 | terminator = CHAR_GREATER_THAN_SIGN; |
6562 | ptr++; |
6563 | } |
6564 | else if (*ptr == CHAR_APOSTROPHE) |
6565 | { |
6566 | terminator = CHAR_APOSTROPHE; |
6567 | ptr++; |
6568 | } |
6569 | else |
6570 | { |
6571 | terminator = CHAR_NULL; |
6572 | if (*ptr == CHAR_MINUS || *ptr == CHAR_PLUS) refsign = *ptr++; |
6573 | else if (IS_DIGIT(*ptr)) refsign = 0; |
6574 | } |
6575 | |
6576 | /* Handle a number */ |
6577 | |
6578 | if (refsign >= 0) |
6579 | { |
6580 | recno = 0; |
6581 | while (IS_DIGIT(*ptr)) |
6582 | { |
6583 | recno = recno * 10 + (int)(*ptr - CHAR_0); |
6584 | ptr++; |
6585 | } |
6586 | } |
6587 | |
6588 | /* Otherwise we expect to read a name; anything else is an error. When |
6589 | a name is one of a number of duplicates, a different opcode is used and |
6590 | it needs more memory. Unfortunately we cannot tell whether a name is a |
6591 | duplicate in the first pass, so we have to allow for more memory. */ |
6592 | |
6593 | else |
6594 | { |
6595 | if (IS_DIGIT(*ptr)) |
6596 | { |
6597 | *errorcodeptr = ERR84; |
6598 | goto FAILED; |
6599 | } |
6600 | if (!MAX_255(*ptr) || (cd->ctypes[*ptr] & ctype_word) == 0) |
6601 | { |
6602 | *errorcodeptr = ERR28; /* Assertion expected */ |
6603 | goto FAILED; |
6604 | } |
6605 | name = ptr++; |
6606 | while (MAX_255(*ptr) && (cd->ctypes[*ptr] & ctype_word) != 0) |
6607 | { |
6608 | ptr++; |
6609 | } |
6610 | namelen = (int)(ptr - name); |
6611 | if (lengthptr != NULL) *lengthptr += IMM2_SIZE; |
6612 | } |
6613 | |
6614 | /* Check the terminator */ |
6615 | |
6616 | if ((terminator > 0 && *ptr++ != (pcre_uchar)terminator) || |
6617 | *ptr++ != CHAR_RIGHT_PARENTHESIS) |
6618 | { |
6619 | ptr--; /* Error offset */ |
6620 | *errorcodeptr = ERR26; /* Malformed number or name */ |
6621 | goto FAILED; |
6622 | } |
6623 | |
6624 | /* Do no further checking in the pre-compile phase. */ |
6625 | |
6626 | if (lengthptr != NULL) break; |
6627 | |
6628 | /* In the real compile we do the work of looking for the actual |
6629 | reference. If refsign is not negative, it means we have a number in |
6630 | recno. */ |
6631 | |
6632 | if (refsign >= 0) |
6633 | { |
6634 | if (recno <= 0) |
6635 | { |
6636 | *errorcodeptr = ERR35; |
6637 | goto FAILED; |
6638 | } |
6639 | if (refsign != 0) recno = (refsign == CHAR_MINUS)? |
6640 | cd->bracount - recno + 1 : recno + cd->bracount; |
6641 | if (recno <= 0 || recno > cd->final_bracount) |
6642 | { |
6643 | *errorcodeptr = ERR15; |
6644 | goto FAILED; |
6645 | } |
6646 | PUT2(code, 2+LINK_SIZE, recno); |
6647 | break; |
6648 | } |
6649 | |
6650 | /* Otherwise look for the name. */ |
6651 | |
6652 | slot = cd->name_table; |
6653 | for (i = 0; i < cd->names_found; i++) |
6654 | { |
6655 | if (STRNCMP_UC_UC(name, slot+IMM2_SIZE, namelen) == 0) break; |
6656 | slot += cd->name_entry_size; |
6657 | } |
6658 | |
6659 | /* Found the named subpattern. If the name is duplicated, add one to |
6660 | the opcode to change CREF/RREF into DNCREF/DNRREF and insert |
6661 | appropriate data values. Otherwise, just i |